pl7 junior/pro premium plc applications process control

3500

2677

00

PL7 Junior/ProPremium PLC ApplicationsProcess ControlTLX DS 57 PL7 40E eng V4.0

Related Documentation


Document set This manual consists of 8 volumes:l Volume 1

l Shared application-specific functionsl Discrete applicationl AS-i installationl MMI application

l Volume 2l Counting application

l Volume 3l Axis command application

l Volume 4l Step by step axis command application

l Volume 5l Electronic cam application

l Volume 6l SERCOS® application

l Volume 7l Analog applicationl PID control applicationl Weighing application

l Volume 8l Process control application

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 3


4 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Table of Contents

About the book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Part I Introduction to the process control application13At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 1 Process control in an automated system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15The place of the process control application in an automation application . . . . . 15

Chapter 2 Hardware and software introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.1 Introduction to the process control processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Features of Processors with built-in process control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2.2 Introduction to the process control software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20How to select and configure the processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21How to access process control application parametering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Description of loop controller parametering screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Runtime screens adjustment tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Operating control loops with XBT terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Autotuning the control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Setpoint programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Chapter 3 Procedure for installing a process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33How to install a process control using PL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34How to install a process control with an XBT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Part II Installing the process control application. . . . .37At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Chapter 4 Introduction to loop controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

4.1 Definition and structure of a loop controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Structure of loop controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

5

4.2 Description of the types of loop controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Types of process control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Introduction to the process loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Introducing the single loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Introduction to the cascade loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46Introduction to the Auto Selector loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

4.3 Description of the processing branches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Introduction to built-in functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49Process value processing branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Setpoint processing branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Feed forward processing branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Loop controller and command branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58The ON OFF 2 or 3 states loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59The PID or IMC loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60The Split Range or Heat / Cool (PID or IMC) loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Output processing branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63Servo drive output branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64PWM branch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Loops summary table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.4 The setpoint programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Description of the setpoint programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Guaranteed dwell time of a setpoint programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Control outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Bumpless start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Executing a profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76How to link a setpoint programmer to a control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Parameters of the setpoint programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Operation initialization and monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

4.5 Global parameters of control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Description of the global parameters of process control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Chapter 5 Calculation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

5.1 Functions of the process value branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Input format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86First order filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Square root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Function generator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Scale limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Level alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

6

5.2 Functions of the setpoint branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Setpoint limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Tracking setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

5.3 Feed forward branch functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Leadlag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Alarm on deviation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

5.4 Functions of the loop controller branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120ON OFF 2 states loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121ON OFF 3 states loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126PID parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Detailed PID equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132Model loop controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135Model loop controller parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Autotuning parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Autotuning process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Autotuning operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Diagnostics parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Aborting autotuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Split Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Heat/Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

5.5 Functions of the output branch,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Servo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Operating process examples of the Servo function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164PWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Output scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169Output limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171Output format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Chapter 6 Control loop configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

6.1 Configuring the loop and the inputs/outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177How to configure a process control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Configuring the inputs and outputs associated with the process control loops. 179

6.2 Configuring MMI ( Man-Machine Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

7

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181How to associate the process control loops to the MMI (Man-Machine Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Description of exchange zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183Using the Man-Machine Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Configuration in multi-station operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

Chapter 7 Control loop adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

7.1 Adjust Feed forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Gain adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Leadlag adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

7.2 PID adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196PID parameter adjustment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Role and influence of the parameters of a PID during a loop adjustment . . . . . 200

7.3 Model loop controller adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204Steps to follow to adjust the model loop controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Instructions for regulating Ks static gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Instructions for adjusting dead time or delay T_DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207How to regulate the time constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Chapter 8 Debugging a process control loop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Description of the debugging screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212Modifying the parameters of each loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Functional modification of each loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Debugging the setpoint programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Chapter 9 Operating the process control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

9.1 Operating applications for XBT-F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Magelis applications offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222Operating page models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224Browsing in the various view formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226How to load an XBT-F application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

9.2 The XBT-F01 process control screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Monitoring screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Front panel screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Trend screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Parameter adjustment screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

8

Autotuning screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Setpoint programmer selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237Setpoint programmer runtime screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238Setpoint programmer adjustment screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240Operating the alarm pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

9.3 XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 process control screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242Monitoring screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Control screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245Adjustment screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247Setpoint programmer selection screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249Setpoint programmer runtime screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251Setpoint programmer adjustment screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254Operating the alarm pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

9.4 Exchange tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256Parameter setting zone for a loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257Periodic data zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Alarm zone (loop only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264XBT specific zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265Multiplexing parameter setting zone for a setpoint programmer . . . . . . . . . . . . 268Default addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Chapter 10 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

10.1 Operating process control channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275Distribution of process control handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276Synchronizing pre- and post- processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Multitasking application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

10.2 Handling process control operations according to PLC operating mode . . . . . 279 Handling process control operations according to the PLC operating mode . . 279

10.3 Common operating modes for process control loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Loop execution in manual and automatic modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Autotuning and Tracking mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Auto / Manual and Manual / Auto switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Behavior of loops during I/O errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

10.4 Operating modes for each process control loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286Process loop operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Single loop operating modes (3 single loops) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Cascade loop operating modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Auto selector loop operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Chapter 11 Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295

9

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29511.1 Language objects associated with the process control channels . . . . . . . . . . . 297

At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Double word "Order of Command" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Control loops command word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Setpoint programmer command word (%MWxy.i.7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304Summary of selection and command words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

11.2 Language objects associated with the process loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Error and diagnostics language objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

11.3 Language objects associated with the 3 single loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Default and diagnostics language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

11.4 Language objects associated with the single loop cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340Fault and diagnostics language objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353

11.5 Language objects associated with the self-selective loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Fault and diagnostics language objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

11.6 Language objects associated with the setpoint programmer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378At a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Configuration language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Fault and diagnostics language objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Process control language objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

10

About the book

At a Glance

Document Scope This manual describes the software installation of the process control application in Premium PLCs: PMX version < 5.0 and TSX version > 5.0.

Validity Note The update of this documentation takes PL7 V4.0 functionality into account. Never-theless, it can be used to install previous versions of PL7.

Revision History

Related Documents

User Comments We welcome your comments about this document. You can reach us by e-mail at [email protected]

Rev. No. Changes

1 First version

Title of Documentation Reference Number

Hardware installation manual TSX DM 57 40E

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 11

About the book

12 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

I
Introduction to the process con-trol application
At a Glance

Subject of this part

This part introduces the principles of process control and the associated software and hardware solutions.

What’s in this part?

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter Chaptername Page

1 Process control in an automated system 15

2 Hardware and software introduction 17

3 Procedure for installing a process control 33

13

Introduction

14 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

1
Process control in an automated system
The place of the process control application in an automation application

General introduction

In Premium processors prior to version 5.0, the process control application was in-tegrated in the processors with references PMX… In version 5.0 and above, the pro-cess control application is integrated as standard in the TSX and PCX CPUs (See Features of Processors with built-in process control, p. 19).Processors possessing process control functionality software channels called pro-cess control channels which can be configured in order to perform process control algorithms for industrial processes.The processes are as follows:l process loop,l cascade loop,l auto selector loop,l single control loop,l setpoint programmer.The input/output interfaces required for process control processing are the analog or discrete module channels of the PLC.Control loop parameters are set during processor configuration via the application screens.

Introduction to the operator dialog

The operator dialog needed for all process control is carried out via the:l PL7 debug and adjustment screens,l graphical pages of the magelis XBT-F Man-Machine interface terminals,l graphical pages of the TXBT Windows Man-Machine Interface terminals.

15

Introduction to process control in an automated system

16 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

2
Hardware and software introduc-tion
At a Glance

Subject of this chapter

This chapter introduces the hardware solutions, which allow the implementation of the process control application, built-in to the Premium programmable PLCs.

What’s in this Chapter?

This Chapter contains the following Sections:

Section Topic Page

2.1 Introduction to the process control processors 19

2.2 Introduction to the process control software tools 20

17

Hardware and software introduction

18 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


2.1 Introduction to the process control processors

Features of Processors with built-in process control

At a Glance Processors used for process control have the same technical features as those de-scribed in the standard hardware manual. The features specific to process control are:l The number of process control channels,l The process control functions supported.

Processor features

This table gives the references and features of the processors, which support the process control functions.

References Number of process con-trol channels

Process control functions

T PMX 57 102

10

Process loop without model loop controller

T PMX 57 202

Process loopSetpoint programmer3 single loopsCascade loopAuto selector loop

T PMX 57 352

T PMX 57 452

TSX P57 203

TSX P57 253

TSX P57 303 15

TSX P57 353

TSX P57 453 20

T PCX 57 203 15

T PCX 57 353

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 19


2.2 Introduction to the process control software tools

At a Glance

Subject of this Section

This section introduces the PL7, XBT and run-time screens editor software used to install the process control application.

What’s in this Section?

This Section contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

How to select and configure the processor 21

How to access process control application parametering 23

Description of loop controller parametering screens 25

Runtime screens adjustment tools 27

Operating control loops with XBT terminals 28

Autotuning the control loops 31

Setpoint programmer 32

20 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


How to select and configure the processor

At a Glance Software installation generic to the applications is described in the manual Common functions (See PL7 Junior/Pro Premium PLC Application Standard applications). However the specifics, such as the selection of the processor and its configuration, are described here.

How to select the processor

This table describes the procedure for selecting the processor.

Note: using process control in an application imposes a MAST task of the periodic type.

Step Action

1 Select the command File → New…Result: the following screen appears.

2 Select TSX Premium plus the desired processor type and version which has the process control application built-in (See Features of Processors with built-in process control, p. 19).

3 Confirm your selection by clicking on OK.Result: the PL7 software creates a new application with the selected proces-sor.

NewMemory cards :

OK

Cancel

Processors :TSX MicroTSX Premium

PCX 57203 V5.0...PCX 57353 V5.0...TSX 57103 V5.0...TSX 57153 V5.0...TSX 57203 V5.0...TSX 57253 V5.0...TSX 57303 V5.0...TSX 57353 V5.0...TSX 57453 V5.0...

None 32 Kmots 64 Kmots128 Kmots128 Kmots-Storage

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 21


How to configure the processor

This table describes how to configure a periodic MAST task.

Step Action

1 Open the hardware configuration editor from the application browser.Result: the following screen appears.

2 Double click on the processor module (avoid the Loops, Fipio or Comm zones).Result: the following screen appears.

3 In the MAST tasks zone, select the Periodic button and indicate the period value in ms.

4 Confirm the modification by clicking on the enable icon in the toolbar:

Configuration

TSX 57303 V5.0 ... XMWI XTI..

0 2 3 4

1

0

PSY

2600

TSX

57303

TSX 57303 [RACK 0 POSITION 0]

Run/Stop input

Configuration

None

Designation: PROCESSEUR TSX 57303

Operating mode Tasks

Automatic start inRun%MWi reset on cold start

Memory card

MAST Fipio modeCyclic

Periodic

WatchdogControlledFree250

20

ms

ms

ms

Network cycle time (calculated)

FAST Fipio modePériode :

Watchdog ControlledFree

100

5

ms

ms

msNetwork cycle time (calculated)

Memory protection

22 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


How to access process control application parametering

At a Glance The method of software installation for process control channels is the same as that used for PL7 application specific functions.

An application specific function has:l dedicated screens,l specific instructions,l language objects (See Process control language objects, p. 295).Installation of a process control starts with accessing the parametering screens, consisting of:l configuration screens (in offline and online mode),l debug screens (in online mode).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 23


How to access the configuration screen

What to do to access the configuration screen

Step Action

1 Open the hardware configuration editor from the application browser.Result: the following screen appears.

2 Double click on the Loops zone in the processor module.Result: the following screen appears, the zone not displayed here is empty.

3 Select a loop controller and an associated function.Result: a description of the control loop and its features (See Description of loop controller parametering screens, p. 25) appears.

Configuration

TSX 57303 V5.0 ... XMWI XTI..

0 2 3 4

1

0

PSY

2600

TSX

57303

TSX 57303 [RACK 0 POSITION 0 ]

Désignation : PROCESSEUR TSX P 57303

Symbole :Fonction :Régulateur :

Configuration

Régulateur4 Aucune

Configuration du DOP

24 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Description of loop controller parametering screens

At a Glance There are two types of loop control parametering screens:l configuration screens,l debug screens.

Illustration of the configuration screen

The configuration screen is as follows.

Description of the configuration screen

The configuration screen is made up of three zones.


Designation: PROCESSOR TSX P 57303

Symbol:Function:Loop Controller:

Configuration

Loop controller4 - LOOP0 Process loop

DOP configuration

Loop parametersProcess valueSetpointLoop controller

StandardSinglePIDNo

Loop

PV

SP10.0

0.0OUT 1

PID

R

L

Feed ForwardOutput 1 Analog

Loop nameUnitLow scale (phy.)High scale (phy.)

LOOP0

0.0100.0

ParametersInstrumentationExecution

FunctionsLOOP 0

1

2

3

Zone Description

1 Module zone: this zone indicates the module concerned,Here the processor module as well as the type of screen: Configuration.

2 Channel zone: this zone has a menu for selecting a loop controller, as well as a menu for selecting the function to be associated with the loop controller:l a process loop,l a cascade loop,l an auto selector loop,l three single loops,l a setpoint programmer.

3 Parametering zone: this zone is used to select the calculation functions of each processing branch. It consists of:l a function selection zone,l a display and parametering zone for the loop controller block diagram.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 25


Illustration of the debug screen.

The following is the debug screen.

Utilities which can be accessed via the debug screen:

The following are the utilities that can be accessed via the debug screen:l simulation of input values (process value, Feed forward, etc ),l animation of the block diagram,l modification of the adjustment parameters of calculation functions,l modification and saving of all parameters,l sending of autotuning and manual commands, etc.




Debug

Loop controller4 - LOOP0 Process loop

DOP configuration

Loop parametersProcess valueSetpointLoop controller

StandardSingleHeat / CoolYes

Low: 0.0

PID


Time constant (s)GainOutput

10.0

4484.536

ParametersFormatFilter

FunctionsLOOP 0

Fct generatorAlarmsSimulation

Loop

1.0

DIAG...

DIAG...

WARNING

Alarms

DL DH LL L H HH

FF3547

SP163.0

PV5000 44.845

35.47

0.0

28.585OUT 12858

045.0R

L

LL

OUT 2

High: 100.0 Loop Scale

26 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Runtime screens adjustment tools

At a Glance The runtime screens editor allows the use of bar charts and specific library objects for the operation of control loops. Animation is automatic and is a simple process. To find out which objects are available and how to use them, please refer to the Runtime screens editor user manual (See RunTime Screens editor User manual).

Example of the adjustment tools

Example of the process control interfaces offered by the runtime screens editor.

ON OFF 3

0.0000.000THRESHOLD HIGH

Text

Text

R

R L

PV Unit

SP

OUT

0.000

0.000

0

Text

Text

R

R L

A M

THRESHOLD LOW

0 10.000HYST OUT 0 0 1

R

S/R Cascade

SP OV2

Text

Text

R L

C O

A M

0.000PV0.000

*xxxxx

UnitSP

OUT

PV OV1

0.00 0.001 2

SP Internal

Auto Selective C P I D

0.0000.000

0.0000.0000.0000.000Kp

Ti (s )Td (s.)

Te (s )OUTBIAS

DBAND

Text

Text

RR L

PV UnitSP

OUT

0.0000.000

#xxxx.x

Text

Text

RR L

A M

AS CF

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 27


Operating control loops with XBT terminals

At a Glance Some Magelis XBT-F terminals are able to manage control loops.

In addition to the services offered by the XBT-L1000 software and the Magelis ter-minals, the XBT-F terminal offers specialized pages to manage each control loop:l control page,l operating page,l adjustment page,l monitoring page,l alarm page.

Control page Control pages are used to control each control loop, manual mode, automatic mode, autotuning, etc.

Operating page Operating pages are used to display the evolution of the setpoint and measurement.

Note: when these tools are used, to make the XBT/PLC dialog transparent, ex-changes are made by default in the word zones %MW3228 to %MW3242 and %MW3350 to %MW4090 (See Using the Man-Machine Interface, p. 185).

2 ON

10000-

DHH

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

AM

IR

AT

:::

PVSPOV

96.0065.0031.00

:OV1 31.000-

DHH

AM

LK

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

96.0065.00

::

PVSP

OV

OV1

31.00

31.00

:

:

28 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Adjustment page Adjustment pages are used to adjust the parameters of each loop: process control coefficients, limits, etc.

Monitoring page The monitoring page groups together the main information about the control loop process. It is the process control operating input screen. It is used to access each loop’s operating pages.

2 ON

DHH

Sa

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

:::

:::

:

1.00.00.00.00.010.00.0

AT

KPTI (s)TD (s)O_BIASDBANDKDORATE1

SP_SUPSP_INFTS (s)PV_HPV_LINTBND

:

:::

:::

100.00.00.3095.05.00.0

Sa

AT

Pr

Ack

AM

LR

Loop 1 Alarm (s)

AUTO LOCALTC_0003100.0

2

DH

206/05/98 ON

15:4115:01:29

06/051998

1/8

9/16

:::::::

1.00.00.00.00.00.0

10.0

KPTI (s)TD (s)O_BIASDBANDINTBNDKD

::::::

1.00.00.0

10.00.100.0.

0.50

KP PrTI PrTD PrATSTEPATTMAXATPERF

::::::

100.00.0

0.3095.05.00.0

SP_SUPSP_INFTS (s)PV_HPV_LORATE1

:::::

60.020.040.0

40.0

PVSPOV

OV1

20mn 10mn 0.026mn

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 29


Alarm page The alarm pages are linked to each loop (HH, H, L, LL). They are integrated into XBT alarm management.

AT

SPP

N°1

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

TC_0001

TC_0002

TC_0003

Alarm page 1 ON

D

L

L

H

30 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Autotuning the control loops

At a Glance Autotuning is applied to most of the processes, such as temperature regulation, flow regulation, pressure regulation, etc.The loop controllers built into these control loops are used to calculate a set of ad-justment parameters (Kp, Ti, Td) on autotune request.These parameters can be accessed via:l PL7 debug screens,l an animation table,l an adjustment screen specific to an XBT-F terminal.

XBT-F autotun-ing page

This page is used to autotune a control loop.

2 ON

ACTUAL PREVDHH

Sa

Ack

AT

Pr

Ack

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

1.00.00.0

StepTmax (s) Perf

10.0100.00.50

::

:

1.00.00.0

:

::

KPTITD

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 31


Setpoint programmer

At a Glance All process control channels can be configured using the setpoint programmer.

The features of a setpoint programmer are as follows:l 1 to 6 profiles,l a maximum of 48 segments distributed over the configured profiles,l Profiles can be assigned to several control loops.

Configuration screen for a setpoint programmer

Profiles are assigned to a control loop via a configuration screen.

Note: when the setpoint programmer is interfaced to a single loop, the PV mea-surement tracking function can be used.

Note: the XBT-F terminal offers an adjustment page and an operating page spe-cifically for the setpoint programmer. These pages are used to modify the desired setpoint profiles.


PV


Symbol:

Ramp

Task:Function:Loop Controller:

80.0

Configuration

Loop controller 5 - SPP_1 Setpoint programmer MAST

%MF24

DOP configuration

SPP_1Name:

Segmentation:8-8-8-8-8-8

StageRampStage

50.050.080.080.0

40.020.040.040.0

SecondSecondSecondSecond

1234

Segment x SP x VAL x Unit Pq S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7

PROFIL_1 PROFIL_2

Segments ExecutionGuaranteed Dwell Time at threshold 5.0 Deviation on inputon

Number of segments: on 88

PROFIL_3 PROFIL_4 PROFIL_5 PROFIL_6

32 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

3
Procedure for installing a process control
At a Glance


This chapter describes the steps required to install a process control with the aid of a Premium processor with the process control application built-in and an XBT termi-nal.


This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

How to install a process control using PL7 34

How to install a process control with an XBT 35

33


How to install a process control using PL7

At a Glance Installing a process control involves a certain number of steps as described in the following procedure.

Procedure with PL7

This table describes the steps to be carried out to install a process control using the PL7 software.

Step Action Mode

1 Configure the processor using the application brows-er.l Hardware configurationl Software configuration

PL7 offline2 Configure the process control channels.l Select type of loopl Select calculation functionsl Enter the configuration parametersl ...

3 If necessary, symbolize the variables associated with the control loops using the variables editor.

PL7 on or offline4 Program the PLC applications by creating specialized

program sections.

5 Transfer the application to the PLC to debug the pro-gram and each application-specific function (I/O, pro-cess control, communication etc.).

6 Debug and adjust the control loops by modifying and saving the values of the control loop adjustment pa-rameters.

PL7 online

7 Print the application documentation that contains in-formation relating to the different application-specific functions (including process control functions): config-uration parameters, adjustment parameters, etc.

PL7 on or offline

34 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


How to install a process control with an XBT

At a Glance An XBT terminal is generally used to install the Man-Machine interface in a process control. Process control algorithms, acquisition and command are carried out via and adjustment, operation and monitoring are carried out via the graphic pages of an XBT-F. The steps of this installation are shown in the following table.

Procedure using an XBT

This table describes the steps to follow to install a process control using an XBT terminal.

Step Action

1 Program the XBT application using the XBT-L1000 software, the directory tree of pages, contents, dialog tables, etc.

2 Transfer the application to the XBT in order to debug the control loops.

3 Debug and adjust the control loops by modifying and saving the control loop ad-justment parameter values, using the preset pages and XBT application pages.

4 Work in runtime in order to control the process loops of the machine using the XBT preset pages.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 35


36 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

II
Installing the process control application
At a Glance

Aim of this Part This part describes the different control loops and functions, as well as their instal-lation, from configuration to debugging.

What’s in this part?

This Part contains the following Chapters:

Chapter Chaptername Page

4 Introduction to loop controllers 39

5 Calculation functions 83

6 Control loop configuration 175

7 Control loop adjustment 189

8 Debugging a process control loop 211

9 Operating the process control loops 219

10 Operating modes 273

11 Process control language objects 295

37

Installation

38 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

4
Introduction to loop controllers
At a Glance

Subject of this Chapter

This chapter introduces the different loop controllers:l types,l structure,l processing branches,l parameters.



Section Topic Page

4.1 Definition and structure of a loop controller 41

4.2 Description of the types of loop controllers 42

4.3 Description of the processing branches 48

4.4 The setpoint programmer 68

4.5 Global parameters of control loops 81

39


40 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


4.1 Definition and structure of a loop controller

Structure of loop controllers

At a Glance Loop controller is a generic term used to designate a processor process control channel. A loop controller can be made up of several control loops.Example: a master loop and a slave loop.A loop controller is thus made up of control loops, themselves made up of:l branches or blocks (process value processing, etc.) made up of:

l calculation functions (gain, filtering, square root, etc.) which are defined by a certain number of parameters.

The PL7 configuration screen is allows you to carry out this hierarchical breakdown.

Illustration This figure represents a configuration screen, which allows this hierarchical break-down, as well as the parametering of the process control channels.

Description This table describes the hierarchical structure of a process control channel.

Loop Controller (Channel)

Loop

Loop schema

ParameterFunction

Process control type

Branch

1

23

4 5 6

7

Number Description

1 Module zone (processor)

2 Channel or loop controller zone

3 Loop tab

4 List of branches

5 List of functions

6 List of parameters

7 Process control loop block diagram

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 41


4.2 Description of the types of loop controllers

At a Glance


This section introduces the different loop controllers as well as their structure.



Topic Page

Types of process control 43

Introduction to the process loop 44

Introducing the single loop 45

Introduction to the cascade loop 46

Introduction to the Auto Selector loop 47

42 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Types of process control

At a Glance For a process control channel, it is possible to select from 5 predefined profiles:l a process loop,l three single loops,l a cascade loop,l an auto selector loop,l a setpoint programmer (See The setpoint programmer, p. 68).Each loop offers default parameters, with the exception of the setpoint programmer. The use of the different functions built into the algorithms (square root, function gen-erator, etc.) is predefined, as is the initial value of each parameter.

Description of the control loops

The control loops are made up 5 processing branches which will create the required algorithm:l the process value processing branch,l the Feed forward processing branch,l the setpoint processing branch,l the loop controller branch,l the output processing branch.The operation of each processing branch (See Description of the processing branches, p. 48) is the same, irrespective of the process control type which is select-ed.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 43


Introduction to the process loop

At a Glance The process loop is a loop with only one loop controller.

Loop diagram This schema illustrates the process paths of the process loop.

Auto

Manual

Tracking

Setpoint

Process value

Feed forward

Manual command

Processingprocess value

Processingsetpoint

ProcessingFeed forward

Loop controllerand

command processing

Autotuning

Processingoutput

44 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Introducing the single loop

At a Glance The single loop profile automatically links three single loops to the loop controller, in order to increase the number of loops. These loops operate independently of each other.

Loop diagram This schema illustrates the process branches for the single loop.

Auto

Manual

Setpoint

Process value


Processingsetpoint Loop controller

andcommand processing

Autotuning

Manual command

Tracking

Processingoutput

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 45


Introduction to the cascade loop

At a Glance The cascade loop is made up of two dependent loops: a master loop and a slave loop. The master loop output is the setpoint for the slave loop.

Loop diagram This schema illustrates the process paths of the cascade loop.

Tracking

Setpoint

Process value

Feed forward

Manual command


Processingsetpoint

ProcessingFeed forward

Loop controllerand

command processing

Autotuning

Manual command

Loop controllerand

command processing

Setpoint

Process value

Output

Autotuning

46 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Introduction to the Auto Selector loop

At a Glance The Auto Selector loop, which is also called the restricted loop is made up of two parallel loops: l the main loop,l the secondary loop.The output is selected according to a precise algorithm.The secondary loop is a single loop.

Loop diagram This schema illustrates the process paths of the Auto Selector loop.

Setpoint

Process value

Feed forward


Processingsetpoint

Feedforward

Loop controllerand

processing command

Autotuning

Setpoint

Process valueProcessing

process value

Processingsetpoint Loop controller

andprocessing command

Autotuning

SELECTION

Processingoutput

Tracking

Manual command

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 47


4.3 Description of the processing branches

At a Glance


This section introduces the different processing branches that make up the loop con-troller loops.



Topic Page

Introduction to built-in functions 49

Process value processing branch 53

Setpoint processing branch 55

Feed forward processing branch 57

Loop controller and command branch 58

The ON OFF 2 or 3 states loop controller 59

The PID or IMC loop controller 60

The Split Range or Heat / Cool (PID or IMC) loop controller 61

Output processing branch 63

Servo drive output branch 64

PWM branch output 66

Loops summary table 67

48 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Introduction to built-in functions

At a Glance The processing branches each have calculation functions built-in. These calculation functions are represented in the block diagram by icons. Each type of branch has specific calculation functions.

Process value branch

List of calculation functions.

Icon Description

First order filtering

Square root

Function generator

Scale limiter

Alarms on level

Totalizer

Set to scale

==

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 49


Setpoint branch List of calculation functions.

Icon Description

Selection

Ratio

Setpoint limiter

Process value setpoint tracker

Speed limiter

Set to scale

SPTrack

50 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Loop controller List of calculation functions.

Feed Forward branch


Icon Description

2 state ON OFF

3 state ON OFF

PID

Internal model loop controller

Heat / Cool

Split Range

PID

IMC

PID

IMC

21

PID

IMC

21

Icon Description

Set to scale

LeadlagLL

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 51


Output loop controller


Icon Description

Set to scale

Analog output

Servo drive output

Pulse output

Output limiter

M

PWM

52 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Process value processing branch

At a Glance There are two types of process value:l Standard process value,l External process value.

The external process value allows you to input to the loop controller a process value PV which has been processed outside the control loop. This solution is offered for cases where calculation of the process value requires specific or customized func-tions which are not available in standard process value processing.

Standard process value

Block diagram of the standard process value branch.

l The first order filtering function has a gain coefficient.l There are four thresholds for the Alarms on process value block with a hyster-

esis of 1% of the full scale.l Two input formats may be used: unipolar or bipolar.l There is no bump when switching to simulated mode; the initial simulation value

retained is the last process value read.l The function generator has scaling built-in.l It is possible to limit the process value to the scale limits.

External process value

Block diagram of the external process value branch.

OUT_TOT

PVPV_SIM FILT_OUT SQR_OUT

%MW,

%IWxy.i

Simulation

Filter

Function generator

Scales Alarms

Limiter

Totalizer

%MF,

%MFxy.i

SimulationOUT_TOT

PV

Alarms

Limiter

Totalizer

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 53


How the initialization works

l On start-up, the associated data is first updated before the launch of the first pro-cess of this branch.

l If the process value input address is not set, processing is performed on the sim-ulated value initially set to zero.

l On initialization, there is a consistency check on the configuration entered. If there is a problem with the configuration, the loop remains in a state of initializa-tion.

Operation of execution check

The two serious faults checked by process value processing are parameter and in-ternal calculation errors (division by zero, overflow, etc.).

If … Then …

a serious error has been detected the loop processing switches to fallback state :l the value of the calculated process value PV is

frozen,l the control loop outputs are frozen.

the error disappears the loop resumes in the previous operating mode, without bumps on the outputs.

there is a serious error on process val-ue processing during a cold start

the loop remains in its initialization position and does not start.

the scale values are incorrect (non-floating value) during a cold start

the loop remains in its initialization position and does not start.

following an error, the loop remains in its initialization position and does not start.

the problem must be eliminated so that it will start au-tomatically.

there is an error on the scale values during operation.

the process value processing is performed with the former, correct scale values which are replaced in the current parameters of the scale. The scale parame-ters are updated when the check is correct.

54 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Setpoint processing branch

At a Glance There are four types of setpoint: l the ratio setpoint,l the selection setpoint,l the single setpoint (remote with scaling),l the setpoint programmer.Only the two last setpoints can be used with the 3 single loops or the Auto Selector loop.

Definition A local setpoint is a setpoint written by a Man-Machine Interface.A remote setpoint is a setpoint produced by a process.

Block diagram of the branch

Block diagram of the setpoint processing branch.

l The local value tracks the value of the remote setpoint in order to avoid bumps on the change of operation.

l If the address of the remote setpoint is not given, local mode is forced.l To avoid changes which are too abrupt, the speed of the setpoint can be limited.l By default, the setpoint is limited to the loop scale. A more restrictive limit can be

fixed.l When the loop controller is in manual mode, the setpoint can track the process

value.


l On start-up, the associated data is first updated before the launch of the first pro-cess of this branch.

l If the process value input address is not set, processing is performed on the sim-ulated value initially set to zero.

l On initialization, there is a consistency check on the configuration entered. If there is a problem with the configuration, the loop remains in a state of initializa-tion.

OR

OR

OR

SP

Remote/Local

Programmer

Ratio

Selection Scale

Scale

Limiter

Limiter

speed

InputRemote 1

InputRemote 2

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 55



The two faults checked by setpoint processing are parameter errors (not written in floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overflow, etc.). When such a fault appears:l The result of the SP setpoint processing is frozen.l Warnings are displayed.l These errors are not considered to be serious at the level of the control loop; loop

controller and output value calculation is performed with the value of the frozen setpoint.

l Calculation of the SP setpoint restarts as soon as the fault disappears.l Other faults associated with the built-in setpoint functions are indicated. They are

detailed in the description of each function (See Calculation functions, p. 83).

56 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Feed forward processing branch

At a Glance In a classic process control using PID, the loop controller reacts to the variations to the process output (closed loop process control). For this reason, if there is a disrup-tion, the loop controller does not begin to react until the process value moves away from the setpoint. The Feed Forward function is used to compensate for a measurable disruption as soon as it appears. This open loop function anticipates the effect of the disruption: this is therefore re-ferred to as an anticipating action (or Feed forward).

Block diagram of the branch

Block diagram of the Feed forward processing branch.


If the Feed forward branch address is not defined, processing is performed on the simulated value initially set to zero.


The two faults checked by setpoint processing are parameter errors (not written in floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overflow, etc.). When such a fault appears:l The result of the processing of this setpoint is frozen.l These errors are not considered to be serious at the level of the control loop, loop

controller and output value calculation is performed with the frozen Feed forward value.

l Specific warnings are displayed.l The value OUT_FF on the loop controller input is updated as soon as the fault

disappears.l Other faults associated with the built-in setpoint functions are indicated. They are

detailed in the description of each function (See Calculation functions, p. 83).

%MW, FF_SIM

%IWxy.i

OUT_FF

Simulation

Leadlag Scale

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 57


Loop controller and command branch

At a Glance There are 8 types of loop controller:l Autotuning PID loop controller,l Discrete mode loop controller:

l 2 states,l 3 states,

l Heat/Cool PID loop controller,l Split Range PID loop controller,l Internal model loop controller,l Heat/Cool internal model loop controller,l Split Range internal model loop controller,

58 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


The ON OFF 2 or 3 states loop controller

At a Glance This type of branch contains only the ON OFF function with 2 or 3 states according to the selection. It is available in the process loops and 3 single loops. When this type of branch is selected, there is neither an output branch, nor a Feed forward branch.The loop controller output is copied into the status bit STS_RAISE1 for the ON OFF 2 states loop controller and also into the status bit STS_LOWER1 for the ON OFF 3 states loop controller.The internal variables are updated by recognizing the previous value of the com-mand.

Block diagram of the 2 states loop controller

Block diagram of the branch with an ON OFF 2 states loop controller.

Block diagram of the 3 states loop controller

Block diagram of the branch with an ON OFF 3 states loop controller.

Auto/Manu

ON OFF2 states

PV%M, %Q

SPSTS_RAISE1

Updating of internal variables

Auto/Manu

%M, %Q

%M, %Q

PV

SPON OFF3 states

STS_RAISE1

STS_LOWER1


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 59


The PID or IMC loop controller

At a Glance The diagram below illustrates the standard PID branch. There are variants, depend-ing on the loops. Each variant is dealt with in the description of the different loops (See Operating modes for each process control loop, p. 286).For certain functions, the internal variables are updated by recognizing the previous value of the command. This enables switching to be made without bumps and en-ables integral action overflow to be avoided by recognizing the output limitations.The output limitations apply in all loop controller operating modes.

Block diagram of the PID or IMC loop controller

Block diagram of the PID or IMC loop controller.

Note: the RCPY input (external input address) only exists on the model loop con-troller.

Note: in manual mode, if the gradient limit is used, the OUT_MAN value (target val-ue before limitation) may temporarily be different from the command applied on output.

PV

OUT_SUP

OUT_INF OUT_RATE

SPRCPY

OUT_FF

TR_I

PIDor

IMC

Auto/Manu

Tracking

OUT_MAN

OUTD

Autotuning

AutotuningLimiter

Gradientlimiter

CalculateenablingUpdating of internal variables

60 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


The Split Range or Heat / Cool (PID or IMC) loop controller

At a Glance The IMC function is identical to the IMC single loop controller.The PID function is identical to the PID single loop controller.The only differences are: l the absence of autotuning,l the limiting of OUT_MAN between 0 and 100,l the value of OUT_BIAS is fixed at 0 and cannot be parameterized.The OUT_MAN command is recalibrated according to the limitations which are ap-plied (as with a single PID), in order to avoid problems with overflow of the integral action and with the operation of the Split Range or Heat/Cool function.Each output of the Split Range or Heat/Cool function has its own limitations with re-gard to level and gradient.The operating mode acts on the output of the OUT_MAN loop controller.

Block diagram of the Split Range or Heat/Cool loop controller

Block diagram of the Split Range or Heat/Cool loop controller (PID or IMC).


l There is a consistency check on the configuration selected. If there is a problem with the configuration:l the loop remains in initialization state,l the error is indicated in the status words.

l On cold start-up, the parameters and input values PV, SP, etc. associated with this branch are first updated before the launch of the first loop controller process.

l It is possible to select the initial loop controller operating modes, by creating pa-rameters in the configuration screen or by sending commands in a sequential program. The loop can thus start in manual or automatic mode.

OUT_RATE OUT1_SUP

OUT_RATE2

OUT2_SUPOUT1_INF

OUT2_INF

PVSPRCPY

OUT_FF

TR_I

100.0

0.0Auto/Manu

Tracking

PIDor

IMCOUT_MAN

OUT1

OUT2

Limiter

Split Rangeor

Heat / Cool

Gradientlimiter

Gradientlimiter

Limiter

Limiter

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 61



The two faults checked by setpoint processing are parameter errors (not written in floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overflow, etc.). When such a fault appears:l Loop controller processing goes into a fallback position:

l the calculated value of the OUT command is frozen,l the control loop outputs are maintained.

l The state returns to normal as soon as the fault disappears. The loop then starts off again on the outputs without bumps.

l The input and output scale values are checked.l In case of inconsistency on a cold start, the loop switches to serious error mode.l Warnings are generated in the status words.

62 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Output processing branch

At a Glance There are three types of output: l analog output,l Servo drive output,l PWM output (pulse modulation).Whatever type of output is used, the OUT_MAN command calculated by the loop controller crosses a limiter whose lower OUTi_INF and upper OUTi_SUP limits are used to define the range of output variation. These limits define the output scale.

Analog output Apart from the limitation aspect, there is no function specific to this process. The cal-culated floating point value is converted into an integer in order to be sent on an an-alog channel (%QW) or in a memory word (%MW).There are two floating point formats:l unipolar [ 0 , 10000], default format,l bipolar [ -10000 , 10000].

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 63


Servo drive output branch

At a Glance This output is made up of a SERVO function with or without a copy of the actuator’s position. l After a Split Range or Heat/Cool PID, only the SERVO with copy position is avail-

able.l With this type of output, the loop controller output scale must be OUTi_INF and

OUTi_SUP in the interval [ 0 , 100 ]. l Its output period is the task period.l If the loop controller is in automatic mode, the SERVO output takes into account

the new loop controller output value in each sampling period. In the other modes, it is in each cycle of the task.

Block diagram of a SERVO output with position copy

Block diagram of a Servo drive output branch with position copy (RCPY).

Information The SERVO function inputs are the output OUT_MAN of the loop controller and the position copy of the actuator RCPY.When the SERVO output follows a Split Range or Heat/Cool function, the copy input is indispensable. SERVO function inputs are then OUT1 or OUT2 and RCPY.

Block diagram of a SERVO output without position copy

Block diagram of a Servo drive output branch without position copy (RCPY).

100.0

0.0 OUT_RATEPIDor

IMC

Auto/Manu

Tracking

OUT_MAN

RCPY

SERVO

AutotuningAutotuning Limiter

Gradient

limiter



OUTDSERVO

100.0

0.0 OUT_RATEPIDor

IMC

Auto/Manu

Tracking

OUT_MAN

AutotuningAutotuning Limiter

Gradientlimiter

EnableCalculation

64 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Information The Servo function entry is a variation of the OUTD command of the PID.

Note: OUTD is not affected by limiting output OUT_MAN. This can be used to per-form a floating process control - the command calculated by the PID has no direct link with the actual position of the actuator. In particular, it is possible to continue opening or closing a motorized valve even when OUT_MAN is saturated.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 65


PWM branch output

At a Glance This output consists of a PWM function in which the input is the command:l OUT_MAN in the case of a PID loop controller,l OUT1 or OUT2 in the case of Heat/Cool or Split Range loop controllers.With this type of output branch, the output scale must be OUTi_INF and OUTi_SUP in the interval [ 0 , 100 ].Its output period is the task period and is independent of the operating mode of the loop controller.


l On startup the parameters and output branch input value are updated before the first processing.

l If the output address is not filled in, the processing is carried out but the output conversion is not performed.

l There is a consistency check on the configuration entered. If there is a problem with the configuration, the loop remains in initialization state.

Operation of execution control

The two faults checked by setpoint processing are parameter errors (not written in floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overshoot, etc.). On appearance of such a fault:l The result of the output is frozen.l When an error disappears, the status reverts to normal and the output is recalcu-

lated without bumps.l During a cold start, if the values of the scale are not correct (non-floating value),

the loop stays in its initialization position and does not restart. Therefore, the out-puts conserve their initial value.

l The loop starts when the error disappears.

66 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Loops summary table

Table This table summarizes the elements associated with each type of loop.

(1) One loop controller, either master or slave.(2) The totalizing function does not exist on the process value branch of the master loop.(3) The autotuning function is not built into the PID/IMC Heat/Cool loop controllers.

Branch Single loop Process loop

Cascade loop Auto selector loop

Master Slave Main Secondary

Process standard process value

No Yes Yes (1)(2) No Yes No

Single standard process val-ue

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Feed Forward No Yes Yes No Yes No

Single setpoint Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes

SPP profile setpoint Yes Yes Yes - Yes Yes

Selection setpoint No Yes Yes - Yes No

Setpoint with ratio No Yes Yes - Yes No

ON OFF 2 states loop con-troller

Yes Yes No No - -

ON OFF 3 states loop con-troller

Yes Yes No No - -

PID loop controller Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Heat / Cool PID loop control-ler (2)(3)

No Yes - Yes No -

Split Range PID loop control-ler

No Yes - Yes No -

IMC loop controller Yes Yes Yes (1)(3) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1)

Heat / Cool IMC loop control-ler (2)(3)

No Yes Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1)

Split Range IMC loop con-troller

No Yes Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1) Yes (1)

Analog output Yes Yes - Yes Yes -

SERVO output Yes Yes - Yes Yes -

PWM output Yes Yes - Yes Yes -

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 67


4.4 The setpoint programmer

At a Glance


This section describes the operation of the setpoint programmer.



Topic Page

Description of the setpoint programmer 69

Guaranteed dwell time of a setpoint programmer 71

Control outputs 73

Bumpless start 74

Executing a profile 76

How to link a setpoint programmer to a control loop 78

Parameters of the setpoint programmer 79

Operation initialization and monitoring 80

68 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Description of the setpoint programmer

At a Glance The setpoint programmer generates a setpoint, which evolves over time according to a parameterized profile: l a maximum of 6 profiles can be configured, made up of a total of l 48 segments numbered from 1 to 48.

The segments are defined by the following parameters:l SPi (%MF), target setpoint,l VALi (%MF), duration or slope of segment,

A segment can be configured as:l a ramp,l a step (in this case Spi = Spi-1).Each segment can be configured in seconds, minutes or hours.

Illustration This diagram illustrates the introductory remarks.

SPi

SPi-1

Si

VALiTime

Setpoint

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 69


Mapping Profiles/Seg-ments

The possible configurations are as follows:l 1 profile with a maximum of 48 segments,l 1 profile with a maximum of 32 segments and 1 profile with a maximum of 16 seg-

ments,l 2 profiles with a maximum of 24 segments,l 3 profiles with a maximum of 16 segments,l 4 profiles with a maximum of 12 segments,l 6 profiles with a maximum of 8 segments,l 1 profile with 24 segments, 1 profile with 16 segments and 1 profile with 8 seg-

ments.

Memory mapping of parameters and setpoints

The 48 target setpoints, as well as their associated duration, are stored in the words %MFxy.i.50 to %MFxy.i.240 respectively. The number of configured profiles does not alter this mapping.For 3 profiles with 16 segments the mapping is as follows: l the first setpoint of the first profile is in %MFxy.i.50 (SP1),l the first setpoint of the second profile is in %MFxy.i.114 (SP17),l the first setpoint of the third profile is in %MFxy.i.178 (SP33).For 2 profiles with 24 segments the mapping is as follows: l the first setpoint of the first profile is in %MFxy.i.50 (SP1),l the first setpoint of the second profile is in %MFxy.i.146 (SP25),

70 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Guaranteed dwell time of a setpoint programmer

At a Glance The reaction of a process to a setpoint change is more or less rapid. It does not nec-essarily follow the variation of the setpoint calculated by the programmer. However, it is still possible to follow the evolution of a process value and to guarantee the pe-riod of dwell at the selected setpoint: downcounting of the dwell period starts when the deviation between the setpoint and the process value is less than a defined threshold THLD. This guarantee can be obtained by:l high deviation overflow,l low deviation overflow,l high and low setpoint deviation overflow,In these cases, downcounting of the dwell period is frozen during each overflow.

Illustration This figure illustrates the operation of the guaranteed dwell time.

SP

SP3 = SP4

SP

S3

S4

VAL4

VAL4

Time

+THLD

-THLD

Point from which the process is considered as SP3

Process reaction (PV)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 71


Procedure for configuring a guaranteed dwell time

To configure a guaranteed dwell time, follow the following steps.

Step Action

1 Select a loop controller.

2 Select the Setpoint programmer function.

3 Select use of the function by checking the Guaranteed Dwell Time box.

4 Fill in the threshold value THLD and the type of overflow required:l high deviation, PV > dwell + THLDl low deviation, PV < dwell - THLDl high deviation, PV > dwell + THLD or PV < dwell - THLDl input deviation, deviation only at start of dwell.

5 In the GDT column, check the dwell on which this function is performed.

6 Enter the address of the process value to be monitored in the entry field PV.Note: If the address of the process value is not entered, the Guaranteed Dwell Time function is not used, even if the latter is configured. During execution, it is possible to inhibit this function by command (See Executing a profile, p. 76).

72 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Control outputs

At a Glance The setpoint programmer has 8 logic bit outputs (%MWxy.i.3:X0 to X7), which can be associated to the segments in order to generate discrete actions.These outputs are called S0 to S7 on the PL7 configuration screen.

Illustration of the configuration screen

This illustration supplies an example of parametering for logic outputs associated to the segments of a setpoint programmer.

Timing diagram of operation

This timing diagram describes the position of the outputs in relation to the current segment.

RampStageRampStage

50.050.080.080.0

40.020.040.040.0


1234


RampStageRamp

40.040.010.0

35.040.020.0

567

SecondSecondSecond

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

SP0

SP1 = SP2

SP3 = SP4

%MWxy.i.3:X0

%MWxy.i.3:X1

0

1

0

1

Setpoint

Time

Time

Time

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 73


Bumpless start

At a Glance A setpoint profile starts on an initial setpoint value SP0, defined in the Execution tab. To avoid a bump on starting, the profile can start from the measured value PV and rejoin the setpoint SP1 according to the characteristics of the first segment.Before a profile starts, the calculated setpoint is, by default, equal to SP0 (or PV de-pending on the profile configuration). In cases where the selected profile is changed, the calculated setpoint can be updated by performing the Reset command on this profile.This functionality is also used to carry out profile loop iterations. To select these functions, simply check the corresponding boxes in the Execution tab window.

Timing diagram of operation

This timing diagram describes the operation of a bumpless start.

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

PV

SP0

Time

Setpoint

74 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Execution configuration window

This figure shows an example of a configuration screen that is used to configure the bumpless, start up and loop iteration functionality.


PV


Symbol:Task:Function:Loop Controller:

100.0

Configuration


DOP configuration

SPP_0Name:

Segmentation:16-16-16

Setpoint

PROFIL_1 PROFIL_2

Segments Execution

Bumpless

SP_0: times


PROFIL_3

0.0

1

310.0Process value (bumpless)

ExecuteExecute to infinity

Resume at segment no.:

Start:

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 75


Executing a profile

At a Glance A profile can be: l executed once,l reproduced a certain number of times,l continuously relooped.The number of repetitions is set in the word NB_RT_PFi whose limits are 1 and 32767.

How to launch a profile execution command

The following table indicates the steps to follow to launch the execution of a profile using a software command.

Note: the first loop iteration segment is not necessarily the first of the profile; its configuration is carried out in the configuration screen, in the Execution tab. The point is to be able to define, for a given profile, segments which will only execute once on start up (initialization segments).

Step Action

1 Assign the value of the command to the word %MWxy.i.7.Note: the list of commands is given in the following table.

2 Indicate the number of the profile concerned in the double word %MDxy.i.8 (1 to 6).

3 Launch the command WRITE_CMD %CHyx.i.Note: transmission of this command is done by explicit exchange (See Intro-duction, p. 298).

76 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Profile execution commands

Only one profile can be launched and executed at any given moment. The following table shows the commands corresponding to the hexadecimal value assigned to the word %MWxy.i.7.

Conditions of execution

The commands have conditions of execution:l the RESET command is always accepted,l the START command is only accepted if the programmer is running,l the NEXT and BACK commands are refused if the profile is not frozen,l the STOP command is refused if the programmer is in initialization mode,l the HOLD_PG and DEHOLD_PG commands are refused if the function is not

used.

Control via the master screen

Each profile can be controlled from its master screen, using the command buttons below.

Command Hexadecimal value Comment

START 16#0002 Triggers execution of the selected profile.

STOP 16#0003 Stops execution of the selected profile.

RESET 16#0001 Reinitializes the setpoint programmer and makes it await START.

NEXT 16#0006 Jumps to the following segment.

BACK 16#0007 Jumps to the previous segment.

HOLD 16#0004 Freezes setpoint evolution and time lapse.

DEHOLD 16#0005 Unfreezes the profile in progress.

HOLD_PG 16#0008 Inhibits the guaranteed dwell time function on the profile in progress.

DEHOLD_PG 16#0009 Activates the guaranteed dwell time function on the profile in progress.

STOP

HOLD_PG/DEHOLD_PG

RUNHOLD

BACKNEXT

INIT

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 77


How to link a setpoint programmer to a control loop

Procedure The steps in the following table show how to associate a setpoint programmer to a control loop.

Step Action

1 Access the hardware configuration via the application browser.

2 Double click on the Loop block for the processor.

3 Select a loop controller.

4 Select Choose the required function.Result: this type of screen appears:

5 Select Programmer as the type of setpoint.

6 Enter as the setpoint input address (SP1 in the block schema) the output ad-dress of the setpoint programmer, that is %MFxy.i.20, where i is the number of the loop controller selected as the setpoint programmer.

Loop parametersMeasurementSetpointLoop controller

Standard

Hot/ColdYes

Loop


Low input scale (phy)High input scale (phy)

0.0100.0

ParametersScaleLimiter

FunctionsLOOP 0

Velocity limiterTracking

78 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Parameters of the setpoint programmer

Internal parameters

Table of internal function parameters.

Output parameters

Table of output function parameters.

Meaning Symbolization Type of data Variation range Default value R/W

Number of reiterations of pro-file number i

NB_RT_PFi Word 0/32767 1 R/W

Value of the guaranteed dwell time threshold of profile num-ber i

THLD_PFi Floating point 0.0/3.4 E38 0.0 R/W

Value of initial setpoint of pro-file number i

SPO_PFi Floating point -3.4 E38/3.4 E38 0.0 R/W

Setpoint to be reached by segment number i

SPi Floating point -3.4 E38/3.4 E38 0.0 R/W

Value of the time or speed for segment number i

VALi Floating point -3.4 E38/3.4 E38 0.0 R/W

Meaning Symbolization Type of data Variation range Default value R/W

Current number of profile CUR_PF Word 0/32767 0 R

Number of current segment SEG_OUT Word 0/32767 0 R

Number of current iteration CUR_ITER Word 0/32767 0 R

Value of calculated setpoint SP Floating point -3.4 E38/3.4 E38 - R

Value of total time elapsed (in-cluding frozen time)

TOTAL_TIME Floating point 0.0/3.4 E38 - R

Value of ime elapsed on the segment in progress (includ-ing frozen time)

CUR_TIME Floating point 0.0/3.4 E38 0.0/3.4 E38 R

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 79


Operation initialization and monitoring


On initialization, there is a coherence check on the configuration entered. If there is a problem with the configuration, the setpoint programmer indicates the error and remains in initialization state.


The two serious faults checked by the process value processing are parameter er-rors (not written in floating point format) and internal calculation errors (division by zero, overshoot, etc.).

l When the setpoint programmer is on the faulty segment, an additional warning is displayed with the following message: "Error on current segment".

l Caution, for these warnings to be displayed, it is imperative that the execution time for each segment is greater than the execution time of the PLC task.

If … Then …

an error in the calculation of the set-point has been detected

the result of the setpoint is frozen

the error disappears normal status is resumed.

a ramp has two identical setpoints a warning is displayed, calculation of the setpoint continues to be performed. There is an immediate switch to the next segment if the programmer is on the faulty segment.

a ramp has a rising or falling speed of zero (0.0)

a warning is displayed, calculation of the setpoint continues to be performed. The calculated setpoint is frozen if the programmer is on the faulty segment.

a dwell has two distinct setpoints a warning is displayed, calculation of the setpoint continues to be performed. There is a rise or a fall de-pending on the setpoint values if the programmer is on the faulty segment.

the guaranteed dwell time is config-ured with a threshold value of 0.0

a warning is displayed, calculation of the setpoint continues to be performed. Processing of the guaran-teed dwell time is suppressed if the programmer is on the faulty segment.

80 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


4.5 Global parameters of control loops

Description of the global parameters of process control loops

At a Glance Some of the general parameters associated with the control channels can be classed in two categories: l parameters linked to loop execution,l parameters which characterize the process control loop.

Execution parameters

This table describes control loop execution parameters.

Parameter Description

Task The process control channels must be assigned to a PLC task, either MAST or FAST. The MAST task is selected by default, the FAST task must be selected when you want to improve the sampling speed and execution priority.

Sampling period This is the processing period of the loop controller in automatic mode. The default value is 0.3 seconds. This value must be a modulo of the task period. Otherwise, the process control processing period will be to the nearest modulo.Example: T_MAST = 0.1 s, T_ECH = 0.124 s T_ECH true = 0.1 s

If … Then …

the sampling period is less than the task period

the true sampling period is au-tomatically fixed to that of the task period.

Period calculations are made taking into account the true value of T_ECH. If the task processing execution time exceeds the theoretical period, the %S19 bit shows this error.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 81


Instrumentation parameters

This table describes process control loop instrumentation parameters.

Parameter Description

Name This name is included in the constants (%KW) and can be given to each loop. It is made up of a maximum of eight characters and is automatically retrieved by the runtime screens dedicated to controlling the XBTs.

Unit This parameter, made up of a maximum of 6 characters, is included in the constants (%KW). These characters define the process control loop unit (Example: DEGRE). This parameter is retrieved automatically by the runt-ime screens dedicated to controlling the XBTs.

Application ID This parameter is used to identify the process control loop configuration. To check their authenticity, these application IDs can be compared with each other. They are a digital representation of the configuration constants of the loop.

High scaleLow scale

These thresholds define the physical scale in which the loop exerts its con-trol. The upstream branch calculations (process value and setpoint) are both set to the same scale.Note: in the setpoint branch there is a scale function which gives the scale range of the variable defined when the setpoint was input. This function is useful when process loops are chained to produce a cascade. By default, this scale must be identical to the physical scale defined by the loop.Note: it is also possible to set the output branch (See Output scaling, p. 169) to a specific scale.

Double word "order of com-mand"

The order of command double word (See Double word "Order of Com-mand", p. 300) is used to manage the loop operation. It replaces the use of the WRITE_CMD function. For the first 16 bits, this double word is identical to the status word of the process control loop.

82 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

5
Calculation functions
At a Glance


This chapter describes the calculation functions of the different processing branch-es: l Functions of the process value branch,l Functions of the setpoint branch,l Functions of the Feed forward branch,l Functions of the loop controller branch,l Functions of the output branch.



Section Topic Page

5.1 Functions of the process value branch 85

5.2 Functions of the setpoint branch 101

5.3 Feed forward branch functions 113

5.4 Functions of the loop controller branch 120

5.5 Functions of the output branch, 160

83


84 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


5.1 Functions of the process value branch

At a Glance


This section describes the calculation functions of the process value processing branch:l Input format,l Filter,l Square root,l Function generator,l Scaling,l Scale limiter,l Alarms on level,l Totalizer.



Topic Page

Input format 86

First order filtering 88

Square root 90

Function generator 91

Scaling 94

Scale limiter 95

Level alarms 96

Totalizer 98

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 85


Input format

Description The "input format" function is used solely for a standard type process value. It pro-vides the gross value of the analog input of the loop. For this, you must configure the format to comply with the type of analog input channel.Two range formats are possible: l Unipolar: 0 to 10000 (selection by default),l Bipolar: -10000 to +10000.

Process value input address

You must define the process value input address on the on the PL7 process control configuration screen. For a standard type process value, this must be an %IW input word or an internal %MW word.The input address is entered in the graphic section of the screen:

Function parameters

Input parameter:

Internal parameter:

Output parameter:




Configuration

Loop Controller 4 – LOOP0 Process loop

DOP configuration

Loop parametersProcess value Standard

Range UnipolarParameters

FormatFilter

Functions

LOOP 0Loop

PISP1

PV OUT 1%MW1 %MW6

Parameter Symbol Type Limits Default value R/W

Process value input

/ %IW%MW

-32768 / 32767 / R


Range PV_UNI_BIP %KW bit / 0 (Unipolar) R


Input enabled PV_SIM Word -32768 / 32767 0 R/W

86 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Operation monitoring

If you do not enter the input address, the value read is the simulation value. This val-ue is initially at 0.

For an external process value

For an external type process value, the "input format" function is not used, because this is directly of integer type. This input is then recopied into the process value float-ing variable (PV) on entering the loop controller.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 87


First order filtering

Description This function performs first order filtering with a time constant T. The transfer func-tion of the filer is as follows:

This first order filter is applied directly to the input process value.

11 + pT_FILT

FILT_OUT = GAIN_FILT x

avec :PV_SIM : Valeur d’entrée de la fonctionT_FILT : Constante de tempsFILT_OUT : Résultat de la fonctionp : Opérateur de LaplaceGAIN_FILT : Coefficient de proportion

x PV_SIM

GAIN_FILTxPV_SIM

T_FILT

FILT_OUT

Value ofPV_SIM and FILT_OUT

Time

88 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Function parameters

Input parameter:

Internal parameters:

Output parameter:


Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management of the process value branch. If the time constant is negative, its value is set at 0.0.


Input enabled PV_SIM Word -32768 / 32767 0 R/W

Parameter Symbol Type Limits Default val-ue

R/W

Filtering time (ms)

T_FILT Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Gain GAIN_FILT Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 1.0 R/W

Parameter Symbol Type Limits Default value

R/W

Output value FILT_OUT Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38 / R

Note: If the function is not selected, the filter output value is the same is as its input value.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 89


Square root

Description This function calculates the square root of a numerical size. The square root extract is typically used to linearize an output process value produced by a deprimogenous unit The function performs the following calculation:

Function parameters

Input parameter:

Output parameter:


There is no specific check dedicated to this function. The monitoring of the parame-ters is integrated into the error management of the process value branch.

OUT = 100 FILT_OUTOUT = 0

if FILT_OUT > 0if FILT_OUT < 0


R/W

Function input FILT_OUT Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R


R/W

Output value SQRT_OUT Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38 / R

Note: If the function is not selected, the value of its output is the same as its input value.

90 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Function generator

Description The generator corrects the non-linear readings of the process value input signal. Correcting this non-linearity is done via 7 linear adjacent segments, in variable in-crements, defined by the coordinates of their points.The function also performs a scaling which is exclusive to the process value scaling function, described below. The output is calculated by the linear interpolation between the 2 points whose ab-cissae contain the input parameter value.PV = f(x) = {(X1,Y1), …, (X7,Y7)}where:X1 = 0 or -10000 and Y1= PV_INF (low limit of the loop scale),X7 = 10000 et Y7= PV_SUP (high limit of the loop scale).Function generation diagram:

Outside the input scale, it is possible using configuration to extrapolate or limit the value of the measurement value calculated on the process value scale.

PV

PV_SUP

E2_OUT, E3_OUT

PV_INF

0 or-10000

E3_IN E4_INE5_IN

E6_IN 10000

E4_OUT

E7_OUTE5_OUT, E6_OUT

E2_IN E7_IN

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 91


Parameters Input parameter:


Output parameter:


R/W

Function input SQRT_OUT Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R


R/W

Extrapolation EXTRAPOL Bit constant / 0 (no) R

Abcissa 1 / Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 or-1000.0

/

Abscissa 2 E2_IN Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 1428.0 R/W






Abscissa 8 / Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 10000.0 /

Coordinate 1 PV_INF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Coordinate 2 E2_OUT Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 14.28 R/W






Coordinate 8 PV_SUP Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W


R/W

Process value PV Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

Note: Parameters PV_INF and PV_SUP are defined within the global parameters of the loop.

92 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



The monitoring of the parameters is integrated into the error management of the pro-cess value branch. The coordinates of the abcissae must be ascending. For example, if Ej+1_IN < Ej_IN, a warning message is displayed. Nonetheless the calculation is done with the current parameters.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 93


Scaling

At a Glance The process value branch is scaled automatically from the global parameters of the loop: PV_INF and PV_SUP (See Description of the global parameters of process control loops, p. 81).

94 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Scale limiter

Description This function is used to limit the process value in relation to the physical scale de-fined for the process control loop.If this function is activated, the scaling is only done in the range PV_INF to PV_SUP. Outside of this range, the output is limited to the scale values.Value on limiter output:

PV_SUP

PV

PV_INF

PV_INF PV PV_SUP

PV on limiter output

Process value

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 95


Level alarms

Description This function monitors the progress of the process value by comparing its value to the 4 thresholds PV_LL, PV_L, PV_H and PV_HH.Each alarm possesses an associated status bit. These alarms are controlled by a fixed hysteresis of 1% in relation to the scale de-fined in the global parameters of the loop.Alarms for crossing threshold PV_H or PV_L:

PV

STS_PV_H

PV

STS_PV_L

Hyst (1%)

PV_L

t

t

PV_H

t

t

Hyst (1%)

96 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000




Output parameters:

(*) Or bit logic of alarms upon crossing threshold and alarms on deviation.


The monitoring of the parameters is integrated into the error management of the pro-cess value branch.


R/W

Process value PV Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38 / R


R/W

Very low threshold

PV_LL Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38 5.0 R/W

Low threshold PV_L Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38 5.0 R/W

High thresh-old

PV_H Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38 95.0 R/W

Very high threshold

PV_HH Floating point -3.4 E38 / 3.4E38 95.0 R/W


R/W

Very low limit STS_PV_LL_LIM Bit / / R

Low limit STS_PV_L_LIM Bit / / R

High limit STS_PV_H_LIM Bit / / R

Very high limit STS_PV_HH_LIM Bit / / R

Or alarms (*) STS_ALARMS Bit / / R

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 97


Totalizer

Description This function includes the input value (typically a negative) according to time, and returns a cumulative (typically a volume).For this, it uses a partial internal accumulator Acc which includes the PV value and is automatically reset to 0 each time it reaches an adjustable threshold THLD. The number of resets is recorded in order to enable the recomposing of the global cumulative OUT_TOT.

Function principle

On each execution the accumulator Acc and the cumulative OUT_TOT are calculat-ed using the algorithm:Acc(new) = Acc(old) + PV. DTSI Acc(new) >= THLD ALORSAcc(new) = Acc(new) - THLDCptInit = CptInit + 1FINSIOUT_TOT = CptInit x THLD + Acc(new)where:CptInit = number of resetsDT = task periodACC (old) = value of accumulator Acc on the previous cycle

Adjusting the integration threshold THLD

Generally, integration threshold value corresponds to an easily determined process characteristic (the capacity of a tank, for example). During a cycle, a status bit is set to 1 each time the partial accumulator reaches the integration threshold.The function can also be used to integrate small input value, even when the result of the integration is very large. In this case, the values to be integrated may become negligible to the accumulated value and are therefore no longer taken into consider-ation.To avoid this, we advise you to limit the accumulator to a threshold THLD, so that the value to be integrated is never negligible in relation to this partial accumulator. When the threshold THLD is equal to 0, the function does not integrate a value and the function remains fixed.

Time Base In order to integrate the new process value, the relationship between the cumulative

value and the PV value must be less than 109.

98 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Associated commands

Two commands are associated to the function:l Reset: the OUT_TOT function output is set to 0, as are all the internal variables

(following a phase change in production, for example).l Hold: integration is paused. The function output retains its former value.

In this mode the user can modify the cumulative value OUT_TOT, prompting a new calculation of the internal variables. This allows the cumulative value to be recalibrated (after an automation stop, for example).

Timing graph Totalizer Function:



OVER_TOT = 1

THLD

OUT_TOT

OVER_TOT = 1STS_THLD_TOT

THLD


R/W



R/W

Totalizing threshold

THLD Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 1.0E38 R/W

Time Base (h) / %KW bit / / R

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 99


Output parameters:


The monitoring of the parameters is integrated into the error management of the pro-cess value branch.


R/W

Totalizing val-ue

OUT_TOT Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R

Threshold reached

STS_THLD_TOT Bit / / R

100 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


5.2 Functions of the setpoint branch

At a Glance


This section describes the calculation functions of the setpoint processing branch:l Ratio,l Selection,l Scaling,l Setpoint limiter,l Tracking setpoint,l Speed limiter



Topic Page

Ratio 102

Selection 104

Scaling 105

Setpoint limiter 107

Tracking setpoint 109

Speed limiter 111

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 101


Ratio

Description The Ratio function is used to carry out the report process control; in other words, to assign a size to the value of the external input (control value).The Ratio function calculates the loop controller setpoint according to the control val-ue, by applying the following formula:SP = RATIO x (SP Remote 1) + RATIO_BIASwhere:SP Remote 1 = control value.It is possible to define maximum and minimum limitations on the ratio reports.

Functional diagram of the Ratio function:



Note: The size connected to the SP Remote 1 input is an external process value rather than a setpoint.

RATIO_MIN

RATIO_MAX

+X

RATIORATIO_BIAS

SPXRemote %MF+


R/W

Setpoint input / %MFi -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R


R/W

Ratio value RATIO Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 1.0 R/W

Min ratio val-ue

RATIO_MIN Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Max ratio val-ue

RATIO_MAX Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W

Ratio bias RATIO_BIAS Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

102 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Output parameters:


Monitoring the parameters is integrated into the error management of the setpoint branch.


R/W

Setpoint value SP Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

Scale error RATIO_WARN Bit / / R

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 103


Selection

Description The selection function is used to select a setpoint by comparing two numerical in-puts. This selection can be:l Max selection: the Remote 1 setpoint input is greater than the Remote 2 setpoint

input,l Min selection: the Remote 1 setpoint input is smaller than the Remote 2 setpoint

input,l "Switch" selection: the input is selected by an explicit command.

The switch is straightforward and is done without hysteresis.


Monitoring this function is integrated into the error management of the setpoint branch.

104 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Scaling

Description This function is used to express a setpoint value in the process value scale defined by PV_INF and PV_SUP (loop parameters). It takes into account the input range of the setpoint (INP_INFRi, INP_SUPRi) and is applied to the Remote 1 and Remote 2 setpoints. The Scaling function performs the following calculation:

This function is optional and can be used to track two loops (to cascade two process loops, for example). In the absence of this function: INP_INFRi = PV_INF and INP_SUPRi = PV_SUP.Functional diagram of the Scaling function:

Changing the setpoint according to Remote setpoint input

SP = (IN - INP_INFRi) x PV_SUP - PV_INFINP_SUPRi - INP_INFRi

+PV_INF

10000

0

PV_SUP = 250°C

PV_INF = 10°C

INP_SUPRi = 250.0

INP_INFRi = 10.0

Loop controller

Process value

Setpoint

PV_SUP

INP_INFRi %MFRemote Input

SP

SP

INP_SUPRi

PV_INF

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 105




Output parameter:


Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management of the setpoint branch. Si INP_INFRi >= INP_SUPRi, the setpoint output remains un-changed. An error bit is set to 1 in the status words.


R/W

Setpoint input / %MFi -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R/W


R/W

Low input scale

INP_INFRi Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

High input scale

INP_SUPRi Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W


R/W


106 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Setpoint limiter

Description When this function is activated, the scaling is only done in the range limits, defined by the parameters SP_MIN and SP_MAX. When this function is not activated, the setpoint value is limited to the physical scales of the regulation loop.The interval (SP_MIN / SP_MAX) must be included in the interval (PV_INF / PV_SUP).The interval [SP_MIN / SP_MAX] must be in the interval (PV_INF / PV_SUP).



Output parameter:

PV_SUP

INP_INFRi %MF

SP

SP

INP_SUPRi

PV_INFSP_MIN

SP_MAX

RemoteInput


R/W



R/W

Low setpoint limit

SP_MIN Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

High setpoint limit

SP_MAX Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W


R/W


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 107



Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management of the setpoint branch.If SP_MIN >= SP_MAX, SP_MIN < PV_INF or SP_MAX > PV_SUP, the setpoint output remains unchanged and a bit is set to state 1 in the status words.

108 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Tracking setpoint

Description In local setpoint mode and when the corrector is not in automatic mode, this function prompts the tracking of the measurement by the local setpoint. This avoids bumps on the corrector output when it returns to automatic mode.

Function not configured

Change of the output when the function is not configured:

PV

OUT

t

SP

t

OUT

PV

SP

Setpoint change

Switchinto manual mode

Switchinto Auto mode

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 109


Function configured

Change of the output when the function is configured:

PVSP

OUT

PV

SP

OUT

t

t

Setpoint change

Switchinto manual mode

Switchinto Auto mode

110 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Speed limiter

Description This function is used, when changing setpoint, to reach the new value while respect-ing a speed limit. Rising and descending speed limits can be different.When the requested value on input is greater than the current value of the output SP, the function increases the value of this output at the speed R_RATE, until the value SP is equal to that requested. If the value R_RATE is nil, there is no slope and SP is a direct copy of the input val-ue.When the input value changes as the slope is being generated the function attempts to reach this new target.Function diagram:



RSP

SP

Setpoint

Time

Rising ramp

Ramp:falling


R/W



R/W

Rising speed limit

R_RATE Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Descending speed limit

D_RATE Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 111


Output parameter:

This function can be applied to the Remote setpoint and the local setpoint or only to the local setpoint, according to the chosen configuration.


Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management of the setpoint branch.


R/W

Limited set-point value

SPEED_LM_OUT Floating point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R/W

Note: R_RATE and D_RATE at 0.0 mean there is no limit.

112 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


5.3 Feed forward branch functions

At a Glance


This section describes the calculation functions of the Feed forward processing branch:l Scaling,l Leadlag,l Alarm on deviation.



Topic Page

Scaling 114

Leadlag 116

Alarm on deviation 118

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 113


Scaling

Description This function is used to change the scale of the digital value of the Feed forward in-put.The Scaling function performs the following transfer function:

Feed forward value:



Output parameter:

OUTFF = (FF - in_min) x(OUTFF_SUP - OUTFF_INF)

(in_max - in_min)+ OUTFF_INF

where:in_min = 0 or -10000in_max = 10000

High scale(OUTFF_SUP)

OUTFF

Low scale(OUTFF_INF)

0 or -10000 FF 10000Feed forward input


R/W

Feed forward input

/ %IW%MW

-32768 / 32767 / R


R/W

Low scale OUT_FF_INF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

High scale OUT_FF_SUP Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W


R/W

Feed forward value

OUT_FF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R/W

114 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management of the Feed forward branch. There is no monitoring on the scale parameter order. The lower limit can have a greater value than that of the upper limit.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 115


Leadlag

Description The Leadlag function performs an advance/delay phase type transfer function. This can be used to make a model of the influence of disruptions and therefore perform a process control in an open loop by anticipation.The Leadlag function performs the following transfer function:

For a graded input, the output response is a function of T1_FF and T2_FF (phase advance or delay):l If T1_FF > T2_FF, a phase advance is performed.l If T1_FF < T2_FF, a phase delay is performed.

Phase advance The Leadlag function is configured in phase advance (T1_FF > T2_FF): the output OUTFF is ahead of the input.

OUTFF = x FF1 + p x T1_FF1 + p x T2_FF

where:FF = size of analog input: internal variable (disruption process value)T1_FF = time constant corresponding to forward motion of phaseT2_FF = time constant corresponding to phase delayp = Laplace operatorOUTFF = calculated size

Value ofOUTFF

Feed forward inputOUTFF

Time

116 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Phase delay The Leadlag function is configured in phase delay (T1_FF < T2_FF): The output OUTFF is behind the input.



Output parameter:


Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management of the Feed forward branch.

OUTFF (T1_FF = 0)

OUTFF (T1_FF = T2_FF/2)

Value ofOUTFF

Feed forward input

OUTFF

Time


R/W

Feed forward input

/ Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R


R/W

Time 1 (s) T1_FF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Time 2 (s) T2_FF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W


R/W

Feed forward value

OUTFF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 117


Alarm on deviation

Description This function monitors changes in the deviation between the process value (PV) and the setpoint (SP), by comparing these 2 values to 2 thresholds (high deviation threshold and low deviation threshold).These alarms are controlled by a fixed hysteresis of 1% of the full scale of the loop.

Alarm on deviation function diagram:

Note: The threshold values must be greater than the hysteresis (1%), otherwise the alarms will still be active.

STS_DEV_H

STS_DEV_L

PV-SP

DEV_H

DEV_L

Time

Hyst (1%)

Time

Hyst (1%)

Time

118 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Parameters Input parameters:


Output parameters:


Monitoring the parameters is integrated into the error management of the Measure-ment branch.


R/W

Measurement value

PV Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R



R/W

High deviation threshold

DEV_H Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 5.0 R/W

Low deviation threshold

DEV_L Floating point -3.4E38 / 0.0 -5.0 R/W


R/W

High limit STS_DEV_H Bit / / R

Low limit STS_DEV_L Bit / / R

Or alarms (*) STS_ALARMS Bit / / R

Note: (*) Or alarms = Or bit logic on level alarms and alarms on déviation.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 119


5.4 Functions of the loop controller branch

At a Glance


This section describes the calculation functions of the loop controller branch:l ON OFF 2 states,l ON OFF 3 states,l PID,l Model loop controller,l Autotuning,l Split Range,l Heat/Cool,



Topic Page

ON OFF 2 states loop controller 121

ON OFF 3 states loop controller 123

PID 126

PID parameters 129

Detailed PID equations 132

Model loop controller 135

Model loop controller parameters 138

Autotuning 140

Autotuning parameters 142

Autotuning process 145

Autotuning operating modes 147

Diagnostics parameters 148

Aborting autotuning 149

Split Range 154

Heat/Cool 157

120 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


ON OFF 2 states loop controller

Description The ON OFF 2 states loop controller is used to process simple process controls, for which discrete 2 position monitoring is adequate. Actuator control is performed according to process value/setpoint deviation in rela-tion to 2 thresholds (a high threshold and a low threshold).Functional diagram:



PV-SP

Time

ONOFF_H

ONOFF_L

STS_RAISE1


R/W

Measurement value

PV Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R



R/W

Low threshold ONOFF_L Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 -5.0 R/W

High thresh-old

ONOFF_H Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 5.0 R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 121


Output parameters:

Process value / Setpoint deviation

As soon as the Process value/Setpoint deviation (DEV = PV – SP) becomes smaller than the low threshold ONOFF_L, the logic output passes to state 1. If the deviation starts to increase again, it must pass the threshold ONOFF_H for the output to pass to state 0.

Operating modes The ON OFF 2 states loop controller has two operating modes:l Automatic mode: the output is calculated by the loop controller.l Manual mode: the loop controller does not set the output. You can directly modify

the value of the variable connected to the output.On a cold start the output in manual mode is at state 0.


An error in execution is signaled in the following cases:l A non-floating input data item is detected on one of the parameters.l A problem appears in the floating-point calculation.l Low threshold > 0.l High threshold < 0.In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The regulation loop output is fro-zen and the faults are signaled in the status words.


R/W

Command status

STS_RAISE1 Bit / / R

Auto_Manu State

STS_M_A Bit / / R

Command / Bit / / R

Process value / Setpoint de-viation

DEV Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

STS RAISE1

%M, %Q

SP

PV

DEV_L DEV_H

-+

122 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


ON OFF 3 states loop controller

Description The ON OFF 3 states loop controller is used to process simple process controls, for which discrete 3 position monitoring is adequate.Control of the 2 actuators is performed according to the position of process value/setpoint deviation in relation to 2 thresholds (a high threshold and a low threshold).This threshold management integrates a parameterized hysteresis. This loop con-troller can, for example, be used to regulate, as discrete a heat /cool process.For more complex process controls, it is preferable to use a PID loop controller.Functional diagram:


ONOFF_HHYST

DEV = PV - SP

STS_ RAISE1

STS_ LOWER1

HYSTONOFF_L

Time


R/W



TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 123



Output parameters:

Operating modes The ON OFF 3 states loop controller has two operating modes:l Automatic mode: the STS_LOWER1 and STS_RAISE1 outputs are calculated by

the loop controller.l Manual mode: the loop controller does not set the outputs. You are able to modify

directly the value of the variable connected to the STS_LOWER1 et STS_RAISE1 outputs.

Operating modes and associated commands:


R/W

Low threshold ONOFF_L Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 -5.0 R/W

High thresh-old

ONOFF_H Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 5.0 R/W

Hysteresis HYST Floating point ONOFF_L / ONOFF_H

0.0 R/W


R/W

Process value / setpoint de-viation

DEV Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

OUT1 com-mand status


OUT2 com-mand status

STS_LOWER1 Bit / / R

Auto_Man STS_M_A Bit / / R

Command value

OUT1 Bit / / R

Command value

OUT2 Bit / / R

%M,%Q

%M,%Q

PV

SP

STS_RAISE1

STS_LOWER1

ONOFF_L

ONOFF_H

HY-

+

124 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



An error in execution is signaled in the following cases:l A non-floating input data item is detected on one of the parameters.l A problem appears in the floating point calculation.l Low threshold > 0.l High threshold < 0.In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The regulation loop output is fro-zen and the faults are signaled in the status words.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 125


PID

Description The PID function executes a PID algorithm with a mixed (serial / parallel) or parallel structure. It has the following functions: l Calculation of proportional, integral and derivative actions in incremental or abso-

lute format.l Antisaturation of the integral action.l Direct or inverse action.l Derivative from the process value or from the deviation.l Parametering of the transient gain of the derivative.l Integral bandl Feed forward action to compensate for interference.l Dead band on deviation.l High and low limitation of the output signal.l Limit of the gradient of the output signal.l Output shifting, also called manual integrated.l Selecting Automatic / Manual operating mode.l Tracking Mode.l Autotuning of the principle coefficients.

Transfer function The PID transfer function depends on the structure used (mixed or parallel struc-ture):Mixed structure

Parallel structure

OUT kp 11

ti p⋅----------- td p⋅

1tdkd------

p⋅+

----------------------------+ +

IN⋅ ⋅=

OUT kp α 1ti p⋅-----------⋅ α td p⋅

1tdkd------

p⋅+

----------------------------⋅+ +

IN⋅=

α = facteur d’échelle = OUT_SUP - OUT_INFPV_SUP - PV_INF

Remarque : le paramètre utilisateur kp peut être spécifié :• soit en échelle physique, alors kp = KP,• soit en échelle normalisée, alors kp = α KP

126 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Functional diagram of the mixed PID

This diagram illustrates the principle of the mixed structure PID. It does not repre-sent the implementation of the algorithm in incremental format.

SP

PV

TR_I

DEVPV_SUP

PV_INF +

- Integralaction

Derivative action

Proportional action DirectReverse

Autotuning

Tracking

Manu / Auto

LimiterGradient

limiter

OUT_MAN

DBAND

OUTBIAS

OUTFF OU

TF

F_S

UP

ti, K, INT_BAND

+

+

+

+

++

td, kd, K

kp

OU

TF

F_IN

F

OUT_SUP

OUT_INFOUTRATE

PVSPOUT_MAN

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 127


Function diagram of the parallel PID

This diagram illustrates the principle of the PID parallel structure. It does not repre-sent the implementation of the algorithm in incremental form.

SP

PV

TR_I

DEVPV_SUP

PV_INF +

- Integralaction

Derivativeaction

Proportionalaction

DirectReverse

Autotuning

Tracking

Manu / Auto

LimiterGradient

limiter

OUT_MAN

DBAND

OUTBIAS

OUTFF

OUTFF_SUP

ti, K, INT_BAND

+

+

+

+

++

td, kd, K

kp

OUTFF_INF

OUT_SUP

OUT_INFOUTRATE

PVSPOUT_MAN

128 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


PID parameters

Mixed or parallel structure

l When the loop controller has a mixed structure (default configuration), the pro-portional action is applied downstream of the integral and derived actions. The gain K applied to these actions is then equal to kp (See PID, p. 126).

l When the loop controller has a parallel structure, the proportional action is ap-plied parallel to the integral and derived actions. In this case the gain kp is not applied to the integral and derived actions. The gain K is simply equal to the re-lation between the output scale and the process value scale.

Direct or inverse action

The direction of the PID loop controller can be adapted to that of the actuator/pro-cess pair. The action can be defined in the opposite direction (default configuration) or in the same direction.If the action is direct a positive gap (PV – SP) leads to an output increase.If the action is inverse a positive gap (PV – SP) leads to an output decrease.

Derivative action The derivative action can act upon the process value or the gap.

Manu / Auto switching

The absolute form of the algorithm allows Manu / Auto switching without bumps (See Common operating modes for process control loops, p. 281).

Adjustment Parameters



R/W

Lower limit of the process value scale

PV_INF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

High limit of the process value scale

PV_SUP Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W

Lower limit of the output scale

OUT_INF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

High limit of the output scale

OUT_SUP Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W

Proportional gain

KP Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 1.0 R/W

Integration time (s)

TI Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 129


Dead band on deviation

The dead band on deviation (DBAND) is used to limit small recovery bumps to ac-tuator to the function point. As long as the gap remains smaller than DBAND (in ab-solute value), the loop controller assumes it to be nil for its calculations.

Integral band The integral band defines a zone (around the setpoint) in which the integral action is calculated. When the process value / setpoint gap is greater than this band the integral action is frozen.

Derivation time (s)

TD Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Derivative gain KD Floating point 1.0 / 3.4E38 10.0 R/W


DBAND Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Manual com-pensation of the static gap

OUTBIAS Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Limiting the output varia-tion, in units s

OUTRATE Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Integral band INT_BAND Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W


R/W

Modified deviation

DEVDBAND

130 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


The integral band is limited to the proportional band (100 / Kp).

BIAS on the command

If the integral action is not used (Ti = 0), the use of BIAS on the PID command (OUT-BIAS), is used to guarantee precision of the function point.If Ti is different from 0, OUTBIAS is not taken into account.

SP

Time

INT_BAND

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 131


Detailed PID equations

Introduction The PID algorithm uses the loop controller parameters (See PID parameters, p. 129) as well as the intermediate variables and the following functions.Intermediate variables and functions:

Variable/Function Description

TermP Proportional action value.

TermI Integral action value.

TermD Derived action value.

TermFF Feed forward action value (disruption compensation).

(new) Indicates a calculated value during the current execution of the algorithm.

(old) Indicates a value calculated during the previous execution of an algorithm.

kp Proportional gain. This user parameter can be specified either on a physical scale or on a standardized scale:

K Integral and derived action gains. The gain varies according to the loop controller structure (mixed or parallel) and the pres-ence of the proportional action:

VAR Variable used in the derived action formula. Its value depends on the "Derived action" parameter:l VAR = PV if the derived action is on the process value.l VAR = DEV if the derived action is in the deviation.

Direction l Direction = +1 if action is direct. A positive deviation (PV - SP) leads to an output increase.

l Direction = -1 if action is inverse. A positive gap (PV - SP) leads to an output decrease.

• Echelle physique : kp = KP• Echelle normalisée : kp = α . KP

• Si la structure est mixte et kp <> 0, alors K = kp• Si la structure est parallèle ou kp = 0, alors

K = α = facteur d’échelle =OUT_SUP - OUT_INF

PV_SUP - PV_INF

132 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Absolute form of the algorithm

If Ti = 0, the absolute form of the algorithm is used. The loop controllers are of type P or PD.OUT = TermP + TermD + TermFF + OUTBIASOUTD = OUTP(new) - OUTP(old)OUT = limit (OUT) (not implemented)

Incremental form of the algorithm

If Ti <> 0, the incremental form of the algorithm is used. The loop controllers are of type PID.

OUT = OUT(old) + OUTD(new), default modeOUT = RCPY + OUTD(new), actuator position copy mode. This mode is used in cer-tain special cases where the actuator position can be different from the calculated output of the PID (SERVO output, cascaded loop or auto selector loop).OUT = limit (OUT)

Antisaturation The integral antisaturation mechanism is implicit in the algorithm.

T_ECH Sampling period.

Limit function Corrector output limit function.

Variable/Function Description

Fonction ∆ ∆(x(t)) = x(t) - x(t-1)

TermP sens kp DEV⋅ ⋅=

TermDtd TermD old( )⋅ sens K td kd VAR new( ) VAR old( )–( )⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅+

kd dt⋅ td+----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=

OUTD = ∆TermP + TermI + ∆TermD + ∆TermFF

∆TermP sens kp ∆ DEV( )⋅ ⋅=

∆TermD ∆ td TermD old( )⋅ sens K td kd VAR new( ) VAR old( )–( )⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅+kd dt⋅ td+

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- =

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 133


Pure integral mode

The loop controller is able to work in pure integral mode (kp = 0). In this case the equations are as follows:OUTD = TermI + TermFFOUT = OUT(old) + OUTD(new), default modeOUT = RCPY + OUTD(new), actuator position copy modeOUT = limit (OUT)


A running error is signaled in the following cases:l A non-floating input datum is detected on one of the parameters.l A problem appears in calculating in floating-point mode.l The output scale is incoherent on cold start of the PLC (OUT_INF >= OUT_SUP).In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the faults are signaled in the status words.

TermI = sens . α . T_ECH/TI . DEV

134 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Model loop controller

Description The model loop controller is used where there are significant pure delays in relation to the time constant of the process, a case which cannot be processed satisfactorily by classic PID process control. The model loop controller is also useful for regulating a non-linear process.The model is first order + delay. Nevertheless, this loop controller can process any stable or aperiodic process, whatever its order. The parameters to be given are:l The static gain (delta process value/delta command ratio in open loop).l The equivalent time constant (response time/3).l The process pure delay value (estimated value).l The time constant in open loop/time constant in closed loop ratio.

Diagram of the principal

The diagram of principal of the model loop controller algorithm is as follows:

Installing the loop controller

Installing the model loop controller is similar to installing a PID loop controller. The adjustment of PID parameters KP, TI and TD being replaced by gain adjustment, the time constant, the pure delay of the process model and the ratio of the time con-stants in open and closed loop. The model loop controller has the same inputs and outputs as a PID (PV, RSP, FF, OUTP). It also has the RCPY optional input (model external input) which can be used to input the process’s real input (the flow measured on output from a valve, for example).

1Ks

FF

PV

DMO

OUTP

RCPY

PROCESS

MODELPROCESS

++

+

--

SP

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 135


Functions The functions other than the command calculation are identical to those of the PID:l Direct or inverse action.l Feed forward action to compensate for disruptions.l Dead band on deviation.l High and low limit of the output signal.l Limit of the output gradient.l Selecting Automatic / Manual operating mode.l Tracking Mode.l Autotuning of the main coefficients.

Delay management

In the processs used by this loop controller, the delay is either:l Variable (transfer of matter according to the flow in a circuit, speed of the trans-

port base, for example). l Very large.These two cases are processed using a register (buffer) of size which can be pa-rameterized. According to the size of this register, it will be possible to sample either all the sampling periods, one period in two, or one period in three etc.It is possible to increase or decrease the delay T_DELAY during the execution of the program. The new delay is applied instantly, as long as it is compatible with the size of the register. The sampling period of the delay remains unchanged. If the value of T_DELAY becomes too large compared to the size of the register it becomes impossible to store enough input values to reach the required delay, if the sampling is done in the same period. Therefore, the sampling period of the delay is recalculated and the output is only valid after a time equal to the new delay. To avoid this problem, you are advised to set the size of the register, taking into account the possible increases in the delay T_DELAY.If the delay decreases by default the sampling does not change. All the same, it is possible to order a new sampling calculation if necessary.In the case of a dynamic modification of the task time or the sampling period, the output is only valid after a time equal to the delay. All dynamic modifications of T_DELAY between 0 s and 30 s is taken into account immediately without changing the sampling of the register.Example

Note: The DMO model output is not directly comparable to the PV process value. At this level, the model does not take into account Ks static gain and possible com-pensation (BIAS).

Sampling period T_ECH = 300 ms

Size of delay register 50

Delay T_DELAY = 25 s

Therefore, the delay register is sampled every 2 T_ECH 50 x 2 x 0,3 = 30 s > 25 s

136 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Function diagram

The function diagram of the model loop controller is as follows:

TR_I

+

- DirectReverse

Autotuning

Tracking

Manu / Auto

LimiterGradient

limiter

OUT_MAN

1+OL_TIME.p

+

- +

+

OUT_SUP

OUT_INFOUTRATE

PVSPOUT_MAN

1/Ks OL_TIMECL_PERF1+ .p

-T_DELAY.pe1

1+OL_TIME.p

Limiter

SP

PV

DEVPV_SUP

PV_INFDBAND

OUTFF

OUTFF_SUPOUTFF_INF

OUT_SUP

OUT_INF

Feed forward

RCPY

Model

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 137


Model loop controller parameters

Direct or inverse action

The direction of the PID loop controller can be adapted to that of the actuator torque / process. The action can be defined in the opposite direction (default configuration) or in the same direction.

Adjustment Parameters



R/W

Lower limit of the output scale

OUT_INF Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

High limit of the output scale

OUT_SUP Floating point -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W

Static gain of the process in open loop

KS Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 1.0 (*) R/W

Time constant of the process in open loop

OL_TIME Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 1.0 (*) R/W

Ratio of natu-ral time con-stant (open loop) to de-sired time constant (closed loop)

CL_PERF Floating point 0,1 / 3.4E38 1.0 R/W

Current pure delay of the process(s)

T_DELAY Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W


DBAND Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Command copy input (optional)

RCPY %IW, %MW -32768 / 32767 / R

Model output (optional)

DMO %MF -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

Delay register (obligatory)

/ %MF:n (**) / / R

138 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


(*) KS and OL_TIME cannot take the value 0 (inconsistent value). They will be forced to the value 1.0.(**) n corresponds to the size of the register and must be greater than 0.


Dead band on deviation is identical to the PID loop controller (See PID parameters, p. 129).

Output parameters

You can access the value of the command OUT_MAN, but also the delayed output value of the DMO model.

Limits The integrating processes are not managed by the model loop controller.You can use a Servo drive without output copy because the model loop controller does not implement an incremental algorithm (the command value is calculated and then the command variation).


A running error is signaled in the following cases:l A non-floating point input data item is detected on one of the parameters.l A problem appears in the floating-point calculation.l The output scale is inconsistent on cold start of the PLC (OUT_INF >=

OUT_SUP).In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the faults are signaled in the status words.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 139


Autotuning

Description The autotuning function is used to gain time during the start-up of an installation by guaranteeing a stable adjustment.The autotuning algorithm is based on a method of Ziegler-Nichols type:l Analysis of the procedure for checking if this is first order with delay. The length

of this analysis is 2.5 times the response time of open loops.l Calculation of PID adjustment parameters (KP, TI, TD) or those of the model loop

controller (KS, T1, T_DELAY). The range of set parameters is moduled by per-formance criteria in order to prioritize the response time to disruptions or stability.

Process types The algorithm processes the following process types:l Single input and single output processes.l Naturally stable processes or integrators.l Asymmetric processes in the limits allowed by the PID algorithm.

Autotuning types There are two possible autotuning types: warm or cold autotuning. The first phase of autotuning is the same for each of these: Noise and stability test of the process of length 0.5x AT_TMAX during which the outputs remain constant. The following phases depend on the type of autotuning. The selection is made automatically by the algorithm.

Cold autotuning Cold autotuning is performed if the deviation between process value and setpoint exceeds 40% and if the process value is less than 30%. Two scales in the same di-rection are then applied to the loop controller output (OUT_MAN). Each scale has a length of AT_MAX.

140 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


When autotuning is complete, the loop assumes its previous operating mode.

Warm autotuning If cold autotuning conditions are not fullfilled, warm autotuning is performed. A scale is applied to the loop controller output (OUT_MAN), then an inverse scale. Each scale has a length of AT_MAX.When autotuning is complete, the loop assumes its previous operating mode.

Time

OUT_MAN

SPPV

STS_AT_RUNNING

Adjustment modeModeProgrammedor Manual mode

Automaticor Manual mode

AT_MAXAT_MAX

AT_MAX/2

AT_MAXAT_MAXAT_MAX/2

Adjustment modeModeProgrammedor Manual mode

Automaticor Manual mode

SP

PV

OUT_MAN

STS_AT_RUNNING

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 141


Autotuning parameters

Internal parameters

Internal parameters of the autotuning function are as follows:

(*) According to the loop controller used (PID or model loop controller).(**) See PID loop controller (See PID, p. 126).(***) See model loop controller (See Model loop controller, p. 135).

Output parameters

For the output parameters, the range of variation (limits) and default value have no object. Therefore, these columns have not been given in the table in order to make it more readable.


R/W

Size of com-mand division (%)

AT_STEP Floating point -100.0 / 100.0 10.0 R/W

Duration of the scale (s)

AT_TMAX Floating point 4,0 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W

Criteria for au-totuning per-formance

AT_PERF Floating point 0.0 / 1.0 0.5 R/W

Proportional gain

KP Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 1.0 R/W

Integral time (s) (*)

TI Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Derivation time (s) (**)

TD Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Model gain (***)

KS Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 1.0 R/W

Model time constant (s) (***)

T1 Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

Model delay (s) (***)

T_DELAY Floating point 0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

142 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Output parameters of the autotuning function are as follows:

Parameter Symbol Type R/W

Value before proportion-al co-efficient autotuning or model gain

KP_PREV Floating point

R

Value before integral co-efficient autotuning or time constant model

TI_PREV Floating point

R

Value before derived co-efficient autotuning or model delay

TD_PREV Floating point

R

Autotuning in progress STS_AT_RUNNING Bit R

Autotuning failed AT_FAILED Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics interrupted

AT_ABORTED Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics parameter error

AT_ERR_PARAM Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics system error or power failure

AT_ERR_PWF_OR_SYS_FAILURE Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics process value or actuator saturation

AT_ERR_SATUR Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics insufficient process value deviation

AT_ERR_DV_TOO_SMALL Bit R

Autotuning Diagnostics sampling period too large

AT_ERR_TSAMP_HIGH Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics inconsistent response

AT_ERR_INCONSISTENT_RESPONSE Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics process value initially un-stable

AT_ERR_NOT_STAB_INIT Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics scale period too small

AT_ERR_DV_TOO_SMALL Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics process value noise too high

AT_ERR_NOISE_TOO_HIGH Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics division period too large

AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_HIGH Bit R

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 143


Autotuning diagnostics overshoot > 10%

AT_WARN_OVERSHOOT Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics minimum phase under-shoot

AT_WARN_UNDERSHOOT Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics procedure too non-sym-metrical

AT_WARN_UNSYMETRICAL_PLANT Bit R

Autotuning diagnostics integrating process

AT_WARN_INTEGRATING_PLANT Bit R

Parameter Symbol Type R/W

144 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Autotuning process

Adjustment mode

Analysis of the process is divided into 3 stages: l Noise and stability analysis of the process.l First analysis of the response to a step function which provides a first identifica-

tion model. From this first estimate a filter is calculated to be used in the second analysis.

l A second analysis of the response to a second step function, refined by using a data filter. A full process model is thus obtained.

After each of these two analyses, a set of loop controller parameters to be adjusted is calculated. The equations giving these loop controller parameters are based on the gain and the ratio of response time to process delay.If the difference between these two analyses is too great, the model’s estimate is rejected and autotuning fails. The loop controller output is set back to its value be-fore the start of autotuning.On a robust level, the algorithm must be capable of supporting the gain and time constant changes in a ratio 2, without losing its stability. The asymmetrical process-es are supported as long as they follow these constarints. If this is not the case, an error is signaled by the diagnostics.

Step function parametering

The 2 step functions applied to the output during the autotuning process are char-acterized by 2 parameters:l The duration of the step function AT_TMAX, which must be greater than 4 s.l The amplitude of the step function AT_STEP, which must be greater than 1% of

the output scale (OUT_INF, OUT_SUP).The function also checks that the output does not go beyond the output scale limits. This checking is done as the autotuning starts.

Maximum duration of the step function

The maximum value of AT_TMAX is limited by the task cycle time into which the loop is configured. This value, in seconds, can be configured to a maximum of 65.5 x task cycle time (en ms).For example, if the task MAST = 50 ms, AT_TMAX = 65.5 x 50 = 3275 seconds maximum.

Parameter values

As an indication, the following table gives the parameter values for some classic pro-cess control types:

Scheme type AT_TMAX (s) AT_STEP (%)

Liquid flow or pressure 5 - 30 10 - 20

Gas pressure 60 - 300 10 - 20

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 145


Performance criterion

The loop controller adjustment can be done according to the performance criterion value AT_PERF.The AT_PERF parameter varies between 0 and 1, which means it is possible to pri-oritize stability for AT_PERF close to 0 or to obtain a more dynamic adjustment (and therefore to optimize response time to disruptions) by pushing AT_PERF towards 1.

Level 120 - 600 20

Steam temperature or pressure 600 - 3600 30 - 50

Composition 600 - 3600 30 - 50

Scheme type AT_TMAX (s) AT_STEP (%)

Note: The parameters AT_PERF, AT_TMAX et AT_STEP are unique to each pro-cess control channel. There is therefore more than one set of parameters for the 3 single, cascade or auto-selector loop controllers. Consequently, for one process control channel, one autotuning operation can be activated and executed at a given instant.

146 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Autotuning operating modes

Autotuning commands

Different commands are used to drive the autotuning function: l Starting autotuning (%MWxy.i.11 = 16#000E)

This command is used to start the autotuning process. It can be directly activated from the autotuning function grid.

l Stopping autotuning (%MWxy.i.11 = 16#000F)This command is used to stop the autotuning process. In this case the PID pa-rameters are not modified and a diagnostic is performed.

l Return to the previous tuning event (%MWxy.i.11 = 16#0010)This command is used to swap the current loop controller parameters with the previous ones (KP_PREV, TI_PREV, TD_PREV). This command is not allowed if an autotuning event is in progress.

Autotuning operating modes

At the start of autotuning, the loop controller can be in automatic or manual mode. When the autotuning begins, it passes into adjustment mode and the output keeps the last imposed or calculated value. At the end of the autotuning: l If it has succeeded, the loop reverts to its previous mode (automatic or manual).l If the autotuning has failed, the output is initialized to the value from before the

autotuning, the adjustments are not done and the loop reverts to its previous mode (automatic or manual).

The direction of loop controller action is checked and compared with model’s gain sign. If there is incompatibility an error is signaled.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 147


Diagnostics parameters

Autotuning diagnostics

For different reasons the autotuning process can: l not be started,l be aborted during execution,l fail by proposing a set of parameters (or not) according to the cause of failure.

Acknowledg-ment

The diagnostics message acknowledgement function is accessible from the PL7 screen or by the acknowledgement commands.

Reasons for the autotuning not starting

The following errors cause the autotuning not to start:l Parameter error (Bit 2: AT_ERR_PARAM)

The possible causes of a parameter error are as follows:l Duration of division too small (AT_MAX < 4 s).l Amplitude too small (AT_STEP < 1% of output scale).l Impossible test protocol. If the current output + n times the size of the scale (n

= 1 for a hot autotuning and n = 2 for a cold autotuning) is outside the output scale (OUT_INF, OUT_SUP), the test protocol will no longer be applicable. STEP_AMPL must be set to a value compatible with the current function point.

l Incorrect sampling period (Bit 6 : AT_ERR_TSAMP_HIGH)If the sampling period is too large in relation to the length of the scale (greater than AT_TMAX/25), the analysis of the response will not be precise enough and the autotuning is inhibited. This case is specific to very quick process controls (AT_TMAX increasing the process’s stabilization time by some seconds). TMAX can therefore be increased, as the algorithm is not very sensitive to this parame-ter (in a ratio from 1 to 3) or adjust the sampling period.

Reasons for the autotuning being aborted

Several causes lead to the autotuning abort (See Aborting autotuning, p. 149).

Note: The diagnostics message is unique to each process control channel. There is only one message for the 3 loops of the 3 single loop controllers, or for the 2 loops of the Cascade and Auto-selector loop controllers.

148 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Aborting autotuning

Stopping after a system fault

Bit 3: AT_ERR_PWF_OR_SYS_FAILUREAutotuning is aborted if a system PLC event appears, not allowing the sequence to progress completely. For example, disconnection will automatically stop the auto-tuning function when the power returns.

Saturation of the process value

Bit 4: AT_ERR_SATURIf the process value leaves the interval of the full scale (PV_INF, PV_SUP), autotun-ing is aborted and the loop controller reverts to its previous mode. Predicting the fu-ture process value even allows the autotuning to be stopped before the overflow occurs (when a first model has been identified).

Insuffiecient variation

Bit 5: AT_ERR_DV_TOO_SMALLThe amplitude of the step function is not large enough to cause a significant process reaction. Therefore it is possible to increase AT_STEP.

PV < 2%

t

PV

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 149


Inconsistent response

Bit 7: AT_ERR_INCONSISTENT_RESPONSEThe process response is inconsistent (gains of different sign). This can be due to a significant disruption, coupling with other loops, etc. The autotuning is stopped and a diagnostic is generated.

Noise too high Bit 10: AT_ERR_NOISE_TOO_HIGHThe process reaction to the step function is not large enough in relation to the noise. Filter the process value or increase AT_STEP

PV

t

t

PV

150 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Duration of the division (AT_TMAX) too short

Bit 9: AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_SMALLThe response is not stabilized until the initial command returns. The calculated pa-rameters are therefore false.

Process value initially not stabilized

Bit 8: AT_ERR_NOT_STAB_INITStarting autotuning happens while the process value was not stabilized. If the pro-cess value variation is significant in relation to the division, the test results will be false.

PV

t

Division test Process reaction

PV

t

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 151


Duration of divi-sion (AT_TMAX) too long

Bit 11: AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_HIGHAT_TMAX determines the taking into account frequency of the process values which are used to calculate the co-efficients. The AT_TMAX must be between 1 and 5 times the process ascent time.

Large overshoot process

Bit 12: AT_WARN_OVERSHOOTThis bit is positioned in state 1 if the reaction to a command division prompts an ex-cessive process value overshoot (greater than 10%). The process does not corre-spond to the models treated by the algorithm.

Non-minimum phase process

Bit 13: AT_WARN_UNDERSHOOTThis bit is positioned in state 1 if the reaction to a command scale prompts a re-sponse inversion in its initial phase (undershoot greater than 10%). The process does not correspond to the models treated by the algorithm.

Non-symmetri-cal process

Bit 14: AT_WARN_UNSYMETRICAL_PLANTThe process is non-symmetrical.

PV

t

PV

t

152 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Integrating process

Bit 15: AT_WARN_INTEGRATING_PLANTEither it is an integrating process or AT_TMAX is too small and the process non-symmetrical. The calculated co-efficients correspond to the integrating process. If this is not the case, restart autotuning having increased AT_TMAX.

PV

t

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 153


Split Range

Description This function is useful if two actuators are used to cover the whole print range of the adjustment spectrum. It is placed downstream of the loop controller.The Split Range function also has the following functions:l It manages overlaps as well as dead bandwidths between the two actuators.l Manual command and a manual order (consistent with a single PID) can be used.The Split Range function is used to manage analog outputs as well as servo drives with copy. It cannot be used to manage servo drives without copy.When this function is used, the loop controller output scale must be (0.100).

Function parametering

Parametering the function defines the characteristics of each actuator, in other words, the way in which the two outputs should vary between the two thresholds.The output value varies in a linear fashion. Outside the two thresholds, output is lim-ited to pre-set thresholds.

OUT1OUT2

Commands

OUT_MAN (%)

OUT1_SUP

OUT2_SUP

OUT2_INF

OUT1_INF

0% OUT1_TH1 OUT1_TH2 OUT2_TH2 100%

OUT2_TH1

with OUTi_THj: output i threshold j

154 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Function parameters

Input parameter:



R/W

Command val-ue

OUT_MAN Floating point

0.0 / 100.0 / R/W


R/W

Value of OUT1 for OUT_MAN = OUT1_TH1

OUT1_INF Floating point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W


OUT1_SUP Floating point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W



-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W



-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W

Input value for which OUT1 = OUT1_INF

OUT1_TH1 Floating point

0.0 / 100.0 0.0 R/W

Input value for which OUT1 = OUT1_SUP


0.0 / 100.0 50.0 R/W



0.0 / 100.0 50.0 R/W



0.0 / 100.0 100.0 R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 155


Output parameters:


A running error is signaled in the following cases:l A non-floating input datum is detected on one of the parameters.l A problem appears in a calculation in floating point mode.In all cases, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the faults are signaled in the status words. A (warning) fault is also signaled if the OUT1_TH1, OUT1_TH2, OUT2_TH1 and OUT2_TH2 thresholds are not between 0 and 100%.


R/W

Limiting the out-put 1 variation in %/s

OUTRATE Floating point

0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W


OUTRATE2 Floating point

0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

156 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Heat/Cool

Description This function is useful if two opposing actuators are used to cover the whole range of the adjustment spectrum. It is placed downstream of the loop controller.The Heat/Cool function also has the following operating processes:l It manages overlaps as well as dead bandwidths between the two actuators.l Manual command and a manual order (consistent with a single PID) can be used.The Heat/Cool function is used to manage analog outputs as well as servo drives with copy. It cannot be used to manage servo drives without copy.When this function is used, the loop controller output scale must be (0.100).

Function parametering

Function parametering defines the characteristics of each actuator, in other words, the way in which the two outputs should vary between the two thresholds. The output value varies in a linear fashion. Outside the two thresholds, the output is limited to pre-set thresholds.Output 1 manages the "cool" and output 2 manages the "heat".

OUT1

OUT2

Commands

OUT_MAN (%)

OUT1_SUPOUT2_SUP

OUT2_INF

OUT1_INF

0% OUT1_TH1 OUT1_TH2 OUT2_TH2 100%OUT2_TH1

with OUTi_THj: output i threshold j

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 157


Function parameters

Input parameter:



R/W

Command value OUT_MAN Floating point

0.0 / 100.0 / R/W


R/W



-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W



-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W



-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W



-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W



0.0 / 100.0 50.0 R/W

Input value for which OUT1 = OUT1_SUP


0.0 / 100.0 0.0 R/W



0.0 / 100.0 50.0 R/W



0.0 / 100.0 100.0 R/W

158 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Output parameters:


A running error is signaled in the following cases:l A non-floating input datum is detected on one of the parameters.l A problem appears in a calculation in floating point mode.In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the faults are signaled in the status words. A (warning) fault is also signaled if the OUT1_TH1, OUT1_TH2, OUT2_TH1 and OUT2_TH2 thresholds are not between 0 and 100%.


R/W


OUTRATE Floating point

0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W


OUTRATE2 Floating point

0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 159


5.5 Functions of the output branch,

At a Glance

Subject of this section

This section describes the calculation functions of the output processing path:l Servo,l PWM,l Output scaling,l Output format.



Topic Page

Servo 161

Operating process examples of the Servo function 164

PWM 167

Output scaling 169

Output limiter 171

Output format 173

160 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Servo

Description This function is used to perform process control with the electric servo drives with or without copy position. It uses the loop controller’s digital output to generate 2 logic outputs, RAISE and LOWER.When this function uses the copy position, it performs a loop control of the actuator position. When the copy position is not used, the loop controller and the associated servo function perform a floating point process control.If the servo function is used, the loop controller output scale must be (0, 100).

Function parameters

Input parameters:

(*) With Heat/Cool or Split RangeInternal parameters:


R/W


0.0 / 100.0 / R

Command value (*)

OUTi Floating point

0.0 / 100.0 / R

Upper stop / Bit / / R

Lower stop / Bit / / R

Copy position / Floating point

0.0 / 3.4E38 / R

Command vari-ation value

OUTD Floating point

-100.0 / 100.0 / R


R/W

Opening time (s)

T_MOTORi Floating point

0.0 / 3.4E38 10.0 R/W

Minimum time (s)

T_MINIi Floating point

0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 161


Output parameters:

Servo with copy position (RCPY)

The Servo function operates differently, depending on whether the copy position is used or not.When the copy position is used, the Servo function generates a binary RAISE or LOWER command for each new OUT_MAN output value produced by the loop con-troller. The duration of this command is proportional to the deviation between the loop controller command and the copy position value, which then performs a loop control proportional to the actuator position.

Servo without copy position

If copy position is not used, the Servo function generates a binary RAISE or LOWER command for each new command variation value produced by the loop controller. The duration of this command is proportional to the output variation from the OUTD loop controller.

The Servo function associated to the loop controller is used to perform a floating point process control. The algorithm does not use the loop controller’s absolute out-put, but the output variation. The RAISE output (or LOWER, depending on the vari-ation sign) is set at 1 for a length of time proportional to the valve opening time (T_MOTOR) and the OUTD variation value.


R/W

Open com-mand status

STS_RAISEi Bit / / R

Close com-mand status

STS_LOWERi Bit / / R

Note: When the calculated period exceeds the loop sampling period (in automatic mode) or the task cycle time (in other operating modes), this is not stored for the next cycles.

Note: When the calculated period exceeds the loop sampling period (in automatic mode) or the task cycle time (in other operating modes), the remaining application period is added onto the new period calculation. This enables it to be processed on several cycles.

162 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Pulse period The pulse period (T_IMP) to be applied to the output is calculated with the following principle:l An initial theoretical value is given by the formula:

T_IMP = (OUT_MAN - RCPY) (%) x T_MOTOR (with copy position)T_IMP = (T_IMP + OUTD) (%) x T_MOTOR (without copy position)

l In order not to generate pulses that are too short, pulses are limited to a minimum time period T_MINI.

l When the pulse time calculation gives a value less than T_MINI, the Servo func-tion does not generate a pulse but stores the value for the next calculation. This enables correct processing where the output variations of a loop controller are in-significant but lasting.

l Without copy position, it is advisable to connect and use position stops in order to prevent the algorithm from becoming saturated.

Actuator opening time

T_MOTOR actuator opening time enables the function to adapt to different servo drives.Pulse time to be applied to RAISE or LOWER is proportional to the full scale actuator opening time.

Minimum pulse period

The minimum pulse period T_MINI is used to avoid generating pulses that are too short, and generally harmful to actuators.When the calculated pulse time to be applied to RAISE or LOWER is less than T_MINI, the function does not generate a pulse. In all cases, every pulse started lasts for at least the T_MINI period.

Position stops When position stop is reached, the RAISE and LOWER outputs are set to 0. The algorithm no longer takes into account the actions going in the direction of the stop.


An error in execution is signaled in the following cases:l A non-floating input data item is detected on one of the parameters.l A problem appears in a calculation in floating point mode.In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the faults are signaled in the status words.If T_MOTOR and T_MINI time parameters are negative, their value is forced to 0.0.When the loop controller is in manual mode, its OUT_MAN output also controls the Servo function outputs.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 163


Operating process examples of the Servo function

Automatic mode with position copy

Operation in automatic mode with copy position. T_MOTOR = 25 s, T_MINI = 1 s and sampling period = 4 s

For each step, the operating principle is as follows:

Step Operating principle

1 The deviation between OUT_MAN and RCPY is 20%. A pulse of 5 s (25 s x 20%) is generated on the RAISE output.

2 The deviation is 10%. A pulse of 2.5 s (25 s x 10%) is generated on the Raise output, without accounting for the second which remained from the previous pulse.

3 The deviation is –2%, which would correspond to a pulse of 0.5 s (25 s x 2%) on the LOWER output. As T_MINI equals 1 s, no pulse is generated (in contrast, the 0.5 s duration is stored.

4 The deviation is always -2%. The corresponding pulse (0.5 s) is added to the previously stored pulse (0.5 s) to give 1 s. As this duration is at least equal to T_MINI, the pulse is therefore applied to the LOWER output.

20%

RAISE

LOWER

1

-2% -2%

2 3 4

10%

OUT_MAN-RCPY deviation

164 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Automatic mode without position copy

Operating in automatic mode without position copy.T_MOTOR = 25 s and T_MINI = 1 s

In this case, the command variation value is taken into account each time the Servo function is operated.For each step, the operating principle is as follows:

Step Operating principle

1 The PID output variation is +20%. A pulse of 5 s (25 s x 20%) is generated on the RAISE output.

2 The PID variation is +2%, which would correspond to a pulse of 0.5 s. As this pulse is less than T_MINI (=1 s.),it does not affect the outputs.

3 This second PID output variation is +2%. In order to be calculated, the function adds this variation to the previous variation (which was below the minimum val-ue), corresponding to a global variation of +4%. A pulse of 1 s (25 s x 4%) is generated on the RAISE output.

4 The PID output variation is -24%. A pulse of 6 s (25 s x 24%) is generated on the LOWER output.

5 Before completion of the following second, a further variation of +22% on the PID output restores the system to a global variation of –2%. As this variation cor-responds to a pulse of 0.5 s (below T_MINI), the function ends by carrying out the minimum pulse of 1 s.

RAISE

LOWER

1 2 3 4 5

20% 22%

2% 2%

-24%

5s 1s

OUTD

1s

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 165


Manual mode without position copy

In the case of operating in manual mode without copy position, the opening or closing bit moves to 1 during a period of time which corresponding to the command difference (proportional to period of opening time).For example, T_MOTOR = 10 s. If the command moves from 30% to 40% then the RAISE output = 1 during 1 s (10 s x (40%-30%)).

166 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


PWM

Description This function is used to control a discrete actuator in period modulation. The logic output is set at 1 following a period proportional to the command calculated by the PID and to the given period modulation. The cyclic ratio of this type of output is de-fined as being the output activity rate, meaning the time ratio when the output is ac-tive throughout the whole period. The cyclic ratio (expressed in %) of a PMW output is therefore equal to the command calculated by the loop controller (expressed in %).When the PMW function is used, the loop controller output scale must be (0, 100).

Function parameters

Input parameters:

(*) In the case of Heat / Cool or Split RangeInternal parameter:

Output parameter:

(OUT_MAN/100)xT_ECH

T_PERIOD

T_ECH


R/W


0.0 / 100.0 / R

Command value (*)

OUTi Floating point

0.0 / 100.0 / R


R/W

Minimum time (s) T_MINIi Floating point

0.0 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W


R/W

Command status


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 167


Function period The function period must be chosen according to the characteristics of the actuator. Therefore it is logical that the function period is equal to the loop controller sampling period because the actuator would not be in a position to take faster account of a sampling command.

Time Base The time base used for modulation is the MAST task period or the FAST task period. In other words, the smallest available pulse lasts for the task period. However, the user is able to define a minimum pulse that is greater using the T_MINI parameter, so that the actuator constraints may be respected.

Resolution The larger the PMW resolution function, the more precise the command carried out will be. The resolution is defined by the relationship between: sampling period / task period. A minimum of 10 is recommended.For example, if the sampling period = 2 s (chosen according to actuator character-istics), the task period must not exceed 200 ms.


A running error is signaled in the following cases:l A non-floating input datum is detected on one of the parameters.l A problem appears in calculating in floating-point mode.In each case, the error is considered to be serious. The loop output is frozen and the faults are signaled in the status words.

168 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Output scaling

Description This function is used to scale the output to the calculated command.The scaling function is optional. It is used to select the scale according to specific outputs.If this function is used, it introduces a scale factor. It performs the following calcula-tion:

Function parameters

Input parameters:

(*) In the case of Heat/Cool or Split Range

OUTi

OUTi

0 or -10000OUT_MAN

OUT_INFi

10000

OUT = (OUT_MAN - OUT_INF) xOUT_MAX - OUT_MINOUT_SUP - OUT_INF

+ OUT_MIN

OUT_MAN = 0 or -10000OUT_MAX = 10000

where:and:

OUT_MAN OUT_SUPi


R/W


-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

Command value (*)

OUTi Floating point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 169



Output parameter:


Monitoring the parameters of this function is integrated into the error management of the output branch.


R/W

Low scale OUT_INFi Floating point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

High scale OUT_SUPi Floating point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W

Note: In the configuration editor, the symbols OUT_INF and OUT_SUP are called Lower limit (%) and Upper limit (%).


R/W


-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

170 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Output limiter

Description This function is exclusive to the scale output function.When this function is selected, it enables the scaling of output between the limits of the range defined by the parameters OUT_INFi and OUT_SUPi. In this case, the output scale is between 0% and 100%. If this function is not activated, the value of the output is limited to the scale of the output defined by OUT_INFi and OUT_SUPi.

The limiter is selected by default with the values for the low limit of 0% and for the high limit of 100%.

Function parameters

Input parameters:

(*) Heat/Cool or Split Range caseInternal parameters:

OUTi

OUTi

0 or -10000OUT_MAN

OUT_INFi

10000

OUT_MANOUT_SUPi

100%0%


R/W

Command value OUT_MAN Floating -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

Command value (*)

OUTi Floating -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R


R/W

Low scale OUT_INFi Floating -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 0.0 R/W

High scale OUT_SUPi Floating -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 100.0 R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 171


Output parameter:

Execution monitoring

The monitoring the parameters of this function is built into the error management of the output branch.

Note: In the configuration editor, the symbols OUT_INF and OUT_SUP are called Low limit (%) and High limit (%), with: -5% < OUT_INFi < 105% and -5% < OUT_SUPi < 105%.


R/W

Command value OUT_MAN Floating -3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

172 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Output format

Description This function is used to set the analog output value. 2 formats (or ranges) are pos-sible:l Unipolar: 0 / 10000 (default selection).l Bipolar: -10000 / 10000.

Output address assignment

The output address is defined in the graphic section of the configuration screen. You should enter a word type variable (%QW of analog output or %MW).

Function parameters

Input parameters:

(*) In the case of Heat/Cold or Split RangeInternal parameter:


R/W


-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R

Command value (*)

OUTi Floating point

-3.4E38 / 3.4E38 / R


R/W

Range / %KW bit / / R/W

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 173


174 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

6
Control loop configuration
At a Glance


This Chapter describes the methods for installing and configuring a control loop in an automation application with a Premium TSX.



Section Topic Page

6.1 Configuring the loop and the inputs/outputs 177

6.2 Configuring MMI ( Man-Machine Interface) 181

175

Configuration

176 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

6.1 Configuring the loop and the inputs/outputs

At a Glance


This section describes the methodology which should be applied to create a process control application with PL7 and the configuration method, and how to use the in-puts/outputs associated with the loop controllers.



Topic Page

How to configure a process control loop 178

Configuring the inputs and outputs associated with the process control loops 179

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 177

Configuration

How to configure a process control loop

At a Glance A process control loop is configured according to a precise methodology which en-sures nothing is overlooked.

Procedure For each process control loop that is to be implemented, you must follow these steps:

Step Action

1 Give an exact definition of the process control structure to be used (single loop, process loop, cascade loop, self-selective loop).

2 Define the algorithm of the various processing branches (process value, set-point, loop controller, etc.).

3 Select the various functions and parameters for each processing branch.

4 Enter the input and output interfaces.

5 Fix the initial values of the adjustment parameters.

6 If necessary, symbolize the associated language objects.

7 If necessary, configure the exchanges for level 2 (supervision for example).

8 Confirm the global configuration.

178 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

Configuring the inputs and outputs associated with the process control loops

At a Glance A process control loop must have inputs and outputs in order to operate. The inputs are used to obtain the process values of the procedure and the outputs are used to act on the procedure to be regulated. The inputs are generally analog inputs and the outputs are either analog outputs or discrete outputs (SERVO or PWM function). The inputs and outputs always belong to modules configured in the PLC.

How to assign inputs and outputs to a process control loop

The following steps describe the procedure for assigning inputs and outputs to a process control loop.

Checks On assignment of the inputs and outputs, the following checks are perfomed:l In order to be able to confirm the assignment of a module input or output in a

block diagram, the corresponding module configuration must have been con-firmed.

l No coherence check is performed at the level of input and output assignment to a particular task (MAST or FAST). It is advisable to assign all the inputs and out-puts of one same loop to the same task.

l If an I/O module is moved, the address is not automatically modified in the pro-cess control loop screens.

l If a language object used by a process control loop no longer exists (for example owing to suppression of the module), an error message appears on global confir-mation.

Note: it is also possible to use words and internal bits which will then be copied in words and output bits, and internal words in which there will already be a copied input value.

Step Action

1 Configure the necessary Input/Output modules.

2 From the configuration screen, enter the addresses of the inputs and outputs in the diagram of the process control loop.Result: the following figure gives an example of assignment.

PV

SP10.0

0.0OUT 1

PID

R

L

%IW4.0

%MF2

%QW5.0

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 179

Configuration

Interface types This table gives the permitted language objects according to the type of interface.

Interface types Permitted language ob-jects

Object type

Standard input process value %IW, %MW Word

External input process value %MF Floating point

Setpoint input Remote 1 %MF Floating point

Setpoint input Remote 2 %MF Floating point

Feed forward input %IW, %MW Word

Analog output %QW, %MW Word

Servo, PWM output %Q, %M Bit with edge man-agement

180 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

6.2 Configuring MMI ( Man-Machine Interface)

At a Glance


This section describes the functions which must be implemented to configure the MMI (Man-Machine Interface) associated with the process control loops.



Topic Page

How to associate the process control loops to the MMI (Man-Machine Inter-face)

182

Description of exchange zone 183

Using the Man-Machine Interface 185

Configuration in multi-station operation 187

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 181

Configuration

How to associate the process control loops to the MMI (Man-Machine Interface)

At a Glance It is possible to associate the process control loops to an MMI (Man-Machine Inter-face) terminal such as the magelis XBT-F. This association is made transparently; simply indicate which loop controllerlers are concerned and assign them an order number.

Procedure The steps described in this table enable the user to associate certain process con-trol loops to an MMI (Man-Machine Interface) terminal.

Note: the maximum number of loops used by the XBT-F terminal is 16.

Step Action

1 Open the configuration window of the process control function from the PLC hardware configuration.Result: the following window appears.

2 Click on DOP configuration.Result: a window appears so that the process control loops concerned can be determined by the MMI (Man-Machine Interface) as well as their order of ap-pearance in the XBT-F operating terminal pages.

3 Select the loops to be linked to the MMI (Man-Machine Interface); the order is fixed automatically according to the order of selection of the loops.


Designation : PROCESSEUR TSX P 57303

Symbol :Function :Loop controller :

Configuration

Loop controller 4-LOOP0 Boucle process

Configure MMI

Loop name Order123456

OK

Details

Reset List

Cancel

Configuration Man-Machine Interface

Loop controller to be used

Order prog.

12

Loop controller 4 - LOOP0Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_1Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_2Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_3Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_MLoop controller 6 - LOOP2_SLoop controller 7 - SPP_3Loop controller 8 - SPP_4

182 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

Description of exchange zone

At a Glance All the variables associated with a control loop have different exchange needs with the operating terminal. l Exchanges can be contextual according to the screen to be displayed, for exam-

ple Kp, Ti and Td for the adjustment screen.l Some variables must be permanently exchanged, regardless of which screen is

being displayed, such as the archive and alarm management screens.l Other variables do not need to be displayed on the operating terminal, such as

the time constant of the filtering function.

In order to structure the communication, whilst at the same time avoiding any pro-gramming, exchange tables associated with process control channels are implicitly reserved and structured in the PLC’s internal memory (%MW).These tables have been created to optimize exchange between the PLC and the MMI terminal.

Illustration The following figure describes the exchange zones.

XBT

API

PV.SP...Loop 1

Loop 3Loop 2 PV.SP...

PV.SP...

%MW

Loop 3

Loop 2

Loop 1

KpTiTd......

%MFxy.i

Process control channels Periodic zone

Exchangescontinuous

Exchangescontextual

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 183

Configuration

Description Description of the illustration representing the exchange zone.

Memory zone Description

Periodic table It is a word table of 6%MF for each operational loop, grouping the pro-cess value (PV), the setpoint (SP),the commands (OUTi),the alarms and the status information for all control loops.

This zone, which is permanently visible, is used to establish the ar-chives, the outlines, the alarm management and the status of each loop.If more than 16 loops are selected, the first 16 will be processed in a periodic exchange table. To process more than 16 loops, you must de-fine the zone Loops (17 and +) (See Using the Man-Machine Inter-face, p. 185) of the details screen.

Parameter setting zone

There are two parameter setting zones:l The loop adjustment zone is a table of 52 %MF (which is 104

%MW). It groups all the adjustment parameters associated with the control loop during display. This table is unique to each loop. Its set-tings management is used to limit the number of memory words used. However, it is simple for the user to operate.

l The setpoint programmer parameter setting zone is a 125 %MW table. It is unique and brings together all existing setpoint programmers.

XBT table This table groups the label, the unit, the scales and the status of each control loop, including the setpoint programmers. This table is read in a unique or a cyclic manner according to choice.

Alarm table This is a 1 %MB loop table for each loop grouping all the alarms of all the loops. With the XBT, the management of the alarms occurs through the dialog table. This zone should therefore agree with the XBT dialog table.

184 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

Using the Man-Machine Interface

At a Glance MMI, which is associated with process control, can be used in two ways: l standard use,l customized use.

Standard use When default configuration is used, the process control applications provided with the XBT-F terminal immediately operate with the preset table addresses. A maxi-mum of sixteen loops is used. It is sufficient to select process control loops to be linked to the MMI. On connection of the XBT-F terminal to the PLC, exchanges are automatically carried out via the preset tables.

Default table addresses.

Customized use If the default memory partition must be altered, the runtime applications for the XBT-F man-machine interface must also be completely altered.

Table Start address End address Maximum size

Alarm table %MW3228 %MW3242 15

SPP parameter set-ting zone

%MW3350 %MW3474 125

Loop periodic table %MW3500 %MW3691 192

Loop adjustment zone

%MW3700 %MW3803 104

XBT tables %MW3810 %MW4090 281

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 185

Configuration

To operate more than 16 loops, the XBT application must be altered in order to cre-ate operating pages dedicated to additional loops. It is also necessary to fill in the address of the new periodic exchanges table, the Loops (17 and +) field of the fol-lowing screen.

Loop name Loop order123456

OK

Details

Reset List

Cancel

MMI configuration

Loop controllers to be used

Parameter setting zone3700 to 3803104 %MW fromLoops:

SPPs: 125 %MW from to 34743350

Periodic exchange zone3500 to 3570(6°6) MF fromLoops (16 max):

XBT zone3810 to 4090281 %MW fromLoops and

SPPs: Alarm zone

3228 to 3230Loops:

Loops (17 and +):

(6°1/2) MF from

Prog. order

12

Loop Controller 4 – LOOP0Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_1Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_2Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_3Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_MLoop controller 6 - LOOP2_SLoop controller 7 - SPP_3Loop controller 8 - SPP_4

Open

186 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Configuration

Configuration in multi-station operation

At a Glance For non-multiplexed use, several operation terminals manage the process control loops. The parameter adjustment tables are also duplicated and dedicated to each loop. One table per process control loop or per setpoint programmer.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 187

Configuration

How to configure multi-station operation

This table describes the steps required for configuring multi-station process control.

Steps Action

1 Click in the DOP configuration box.Result: the MMI configuration screen appears.

2 Click on the Details button to access the details screen.Result: this type of screen appears.

3 Click on the Open button.Result: the tables configuration screen appears.

These tables have exactly the same structure as those used in multiplexed ad-dressing (See Description of exchange zone, p. 183).

Loop name Loops Order123456

OK

Details

Reset List

Cancel

Configure HMI

Loop controller to be used

Parameter setting zone3700 to 3803104 %MW fromLoops :

SPPs : 125 %MW from to 34743350

Periodic exchange zone3500 to 3570(6°6) MF fromLoops (16 max):

XBT zone3810 to 4090281 %MW fromLoops and

SPPs : Alarm zone

3228 to3230Loops :

Loops (17 and +):

(6°1/2) MF from

SPP order

12

Loop control. 4 - LOOP0Loop control. 5 - LOOP1_1Loop control. 5 - LOOP1_2Loop control. 5 - LOOP1_3Loop control. 6 - LOOP2_MLoop control. 6 - LOOP2_SLoop control. 7 - SPP_3Loop control. 8 - SPP_4

Open

Loop nameLoop controller 4 - LOOP0Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_1Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_2Loop controller 5 - LOOP1_3Loop controller 6 - LOOP2_MLoop controller 6 - LOOP2_SLoop controller 7 - SPP_3Loop controller 8 - SPP_4

OK

Cancel

Opening : Exchange Zone per Loop

Selected and ordered loops and SPPs

from %MW to %MW10001150130014501560167017801910

11031253140315531663177319042034

188 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

7
Control loop adjustment
At a Glance


This Chapter describes the adjustment methods for: l Feed forward,l PID,l model loop controller.



Section Topic Page

7.1 Adjust Feed forward 191

7.2 PID adjustment 196

7.3 Model loop controller adjustment 204

189

Adjustment

190 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

7.1 Adjust Feed forward

At a Glance


This section describes the procedures necessary for adjusting a Feed forward:l gain adjustment,l Leadlag adjustment.



Topic Page

Gain adjustment 192

Leadlag adjustment 193

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 191

Adjustment

Gain adjustment

At a Glance Debugging a Feed forward branch firstly requires a Gain adjustment The following procedure describes the procedure to be respected.

Procedure This table describes the steps required in order to adjust the gain of a Feed forward branch.

Example of gain adjustment

If one says that:l the PV variation is at –10% for a disruption variation of 5%,l the process value variation is at 7% for a command variation of 5%,then the gain deducted will be (-10/5) / (7/5) which is -1.4.For a Feed forward input between 0 and 10000 and FF_INF = 0.0 then FF_SUP = -140.0, for a command scale where OUT_INF = 0.0 and OUT_SUP=100

Step Action

1 Put the loop controller into manual mode.

2 Position T1_FF and T2_FF at zero.

3 Establish a disruption scale and stabilize the gain so that the disruption mea-sured when Feed forward is inputted is compensated entirely.Note: the gain on the Feed forward branch occurs according to scale values.

192 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

Leadlag adjustment

At a Glance Debugging a Feed forward branch requires Leadlag adjustment The following pro-cedure and example describe the procedure to be respected.

Procedure This table describes the steps required in order to adjust the Leadlag of a Feed for-ward branch.

Example of Leadlag adjustment

An adjustment of the PV2 output temperature on the secondary circuit of the ex-changer is required. A PID controls the incoming hot air valve according to PV2 and the SP setpoint. The cold water temperature acts as a measurable disruption in re-lation to this process control.The Feed forward function can be used to react as soon as the cold water temper-ature fluctuates and not if PV2 has decreased.

Step Action

1 Put the loop controller into manual mode.

2 Position T1_FF at the time constant value for the process.

3 Position T2_FF at the time constant value for the disruption.

4 Carry out a disruption grade:l if the overshoot is positive, reduce T1_FF, and similarly, if the overshoot is

negative, increase T1_FF,l if the overshoot starts positively, increase T2_FF, and similarly, if the over-

shoot starts negatively, reduce T2_FF.

5 Repeat step 4 until the overshoot is cancelled out.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 193

Adjustment

Illustration of the example:

The working hypotheses are as follows:l The output temperature of the condenser (temperature of the cold water) fluctu-

ates between 5 and 25 degrees Celsius, with an average value of 15 degrees.l A DT variation in this temperature affects the exchanger output temperature en-

tirely.l In order to compensate for an increase or decrease of 5 degrees Celsius in the

exchanger output temperature, the controlling steam valve must be opened or closed by 10%.

Adjustments to the Feed forward input parameters must be such that the contribu-tion of the cold water temperature to the valve controlling the steam flow rate is:l zero to 15 degrees Celsius,l in a ratio of 10% /5 degrees Celsius between 5 and 25 degrees.

SP

-

PID

+

++FFTransfer

function

PVTT2

TT1

Condenser

PV2

QcSteam

Disruption

194 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

The following figure illustrates the adjustment.

Output variation in %

5 10 15 20 25

10

20

-10

-20

Cold water temperature in degrees celsius

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 195

Adjustment

7.2 PID adjustment

At a Glance


This section describes the methods for adjusting a PID:l closed loop adjustment,l open loop adjustment.As well as the role and the effects of each parameter: Kp, Ti et Td.



Topic Page

PID parameter adjustment method 197

Role and influence of the parameters of a PID during a loop adjustment 200

196 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

PID parameter adjustment method

Introduction Numerous methods to adjust the PID parameters exist, we suggest Ziegler and Nichols which have two variants:l closed loop adjustment,l open loop adjustment.Before implementing one of these methods, you must set the PID action direction:l if an increase in the OUT output causes an increase in the PV measurement,

make the PID inverted (KP > 0),l on the other hand, if this causes a PV reduction, make the PID direct (KP < 0).

Closed loop ad-justment

This principal consists of using a proportional command (Ti = 0, Td = 0 ) to start the process by increasing production until it starts to oscillate again after having applied a level to the PID corrector setpoint. All that is required is to raise the critical produc-tion level (Kpc) which has caused the non damped oscillation and the oscillation pe-riod (Tc) to reduce the values giving an optimal regulation of the regulator.

According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:

where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.

- Kp Ti Td

PID Kpc/1,7 Tc/2 Tc/8

PI Kpc/2,22 0,83 x Tc -

Note: This adjustment method provides a very dynamic command which can ex-press itself through unwanted overshootsduring the change of setpoint pulses. In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behaviour.

Measure

Tc

time

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 197

Adjustment

Open loop adjustment

As the regulator is in manual mode, you apply a level to the output and make the procedure response start the same as an integrator with pure delay time. .

The intersection point on the right hand side which is representative of the integrator with the time axes, determines the time Tu. Next, Tg time is defined as the time nec-essary for the controlled variable (measurement) to have the same variation size (% of the scale) as the regulator output.According to the kind of (PID or PI) regulator, the adjustment of the coefficients is executed with the following values:

where Kp = proportional production, Ti = integration time and TD = diversion time.

- Kp Ti Td

PID -1,2 Tg/Tu 2 x Tu 0,5 x Tu

PI -0,9 Tg/Tu 3,3 x Tu -

Note: Attention to the units. If the adjustment is carried out in PL7, multiply the val-ue obtained for KP by 100.

Output

Process responseIntegratorMeasure

Tg

S

M = S

Tu

t

t

198 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

This adjustment method also provides a very dynamic command, which can express itself through unwanted overshoots during the change of setpoints’ pulses. In this case, lower the production value until you get the required behavior. The method is interesting because it does not require any assumptions about the nature and the order of the procedure. You can apply it just as well to the stable procedures as to real integrating procedures. It is really interesting in the case of slow procedures (glass industry,…) because the user only requires the beginning of the response to regulate the coefficients Kp, Ti and Td.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 199

Adjustment

Role and influence of the parameters of a PID during a loop adjustment

Proportional action influence

Proportional action enables the process response speed to be matched. The higher the gain, the more the response will accelerate and the static error will reduce (in purely proportional terms), but the greater the deterioration of stability will be. A com-promise between speed and stability must be found. The following is the influence of integral action on the process response:

Kp too large

Kp correct

Kp too smallStatic error

C

t

200 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

Influence of integral action

Integral action ensures that static error (the deviation between the process value the and setpoint) is canceled out. The higher the integral action (Ti small), the greater the acceleration of the response and the more stability deteriorates. A compromise must be found between speed and stability. The influence of integral action on pro-cess response at a grade is as follows:

Kp = proportional gain, Ti = integration time and TD = derivative time.

Note: Small Ti represents a high integral action.

Ti trop grand

Ti correct

Ti trop petit

t

C

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 201

Adjustment

Influence of derivative action

Derivative action is anticipatory. It adds a term that accounts for the speed variation of the difference, which enables anticipation by accelerating the process response when the deviation increases, and slowing it down when the deviation decreases. The higher the derivative action (large Td), the more the response accelerates. Here again, a compromise between speed and stability must be found. The influence of derivative action on the process response at a division is as follows:

Limits of PID process control

If the process is assimilated to a first command with pure time delay, of transfer func-tion:

with:

= model delay,

= model time constant,

The process control performances are dependent on the ratio

t

C

Td trop grand

Td correct

Td trop petit

H(p) Ke

τ– p

1 θp+---------------=

τθ

100%

Mesure = M0

Mesure = M0+∆M

∆M

θτ tθτ---

202 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

PID process control is suitable in the following area: 2 < = < 20

For <2, meaning fast loops ( small) or for processes with large delays ( large) the PID process control is not suitable and more advanced algorithms must be used.

For > 20, a threshold process control with hysteresis is sufficient.

θτ---

θτ---

θ τ

θτ---

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 203

Adjustment

7.3 Model loop controller adjustment

At a Glance

Contents of this Section

This section describes the adjustment principles of a model loop controller and de-velops the following points:l static gain adjustment,l dead time or delay adjustment,l time constant adjustment.



Topic Page

Steps to follow to adjust the model loop controller 205

Instructions for regulating Ks static gain 206

Instructions for adjusting dead time or delay T_DELAY 207

How to regulate the time constant 209

204 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

Steps to follow to adjust the model loop controller

Procedure The steps in this table describe the action to be taken in order to adjust a model loop controller.

Step Action

1 Use a graphic method based on an indexed response, such as the Broida method. This directly provides the parameters for a first order model with pure delay, in order to identify the process model.

2 Enhance the adjustment by running the IMC loop controller in automatic mode.

3 To check whether the model is adapted to the process, set CL_PERF to 1.0 (time constant of closed loop = time constant of open loop).

4 Proceed to the point of operation and run the loop controller in automatic mode.

5 Carry out a setpoint step function C.

Result: If the model parameters are correct, the measurement should rejoin the setpoint without overflow and the OUT_MAN command signal should be al-most one division. If this is not the case, a correction must be made, which means:l adapting the static gain,l adapting the dead timel adapting the time constant.

∆

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 205

Adjustment

Instructions for regulating Ks static gain

At a Glance If the static gain is correct, at the time of the setpoint scale the size of variation U1 must be equal to U2. If this is not the case, correct the gain by applying the formula: correct Ks = Ks of test x U1/ U2

Illustration of the adjustment

The following figure illustrates the static gain adjustment.

∆∆

∆ ∆

Ks correct

t

U(t)

∆U1 ∆U2

Ks too small

Ks too large

t

t

U(t)

U(t)

∆U2

∆U2

∆U1

∆U1

206 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

Instructions for adjusting dead time or delay T_DELAY

At a Glance Observe the adjustment unit measurement and control signals for a recording. If we call the model delay, two illustrations appear: l model is lesser than process,l model is greater than process,

model lower than process,

The following figure describes this scenario, T_DELAY takes on the value of A.

Note: gain and delay adjustments can be carried out during the same test.

ττ ττ τ

ττ

Process value signal

Inflection point

Tangent

AC = M

Commandsignal

approximately τ process

τ model ∆τ

∆U

∆C

t0

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 207

Adjustment

model greater than process,

The following figure describes this scenario, T_DELAY takes on the value of A. ττ

Process value signal

Inflection point

Tangent

A

Commandsignal

approximately τ process

∆τ

C = M

∆U

∆C

t0

τ model

208 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Adjustment

How to regulate the time constant

At a Glance Having regulated dead time and static gain, the model time constant must be suc-cessively regulated by observing the command signal U(t) record.If we call the model delay, two illustrations appear: l model is lesser than practice,l model is greater than practice,This figure illustrates the two cases.

Signal speed when OL_TIME <

process

The following figure describes the signal speed.

θθ θθ θ

θ model > θ process

t

U(t)

∆U1 ∆U2

t0

θ model < θ procedure

θ OL_TIME <

PV = SP

OL_TIME = θ process

θ process

∆SP

PV

SP (t) and PV (t)

tt0

SP = SP

∆SPKs

tt0

∆SP.OL_TIMEKs.θ process

U (t)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 209

Adjustment

Signal speed during OL_TIME > process

The following figure describes the signal speed.

Closed loop time constant selection

Having determined the model to be used, the closed loop time constant selection re-mains to be made. Its value is dependent on the response speed of the required closed loop.For processes that correspond to a first order model with delay, by choosing a time constant CL_PERF relation between 1.05 and 1.15, the system response is im-proved without running the risk of destabilising the process.

CL_PREF = OL_TIME / required closed loop time constant.

All CL_PERF increases correspond to an increase in response speed (it is a more important action of the adjustment unit), but also to an increased sensitivity to mod-eling errors.

θPV = SP

OL_TIME > θ process∆SP

PV

SP (t) and PV (t)

tt0

SP = SP

OL_TIME = θ process

∆SPKs

∆SP.OL_TIMEKs.θ process

U (t)

tt0

210 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

8
Debugging a process control loop
At a Glance


This chapter describes the process control loop debugging screens as well as the associated operational processes.


This Chapter contains the following Maps:

Topic Page

Description of the debugging screen 212

Modifying the parameters of each loop 214

Functional modification of each loop 215

Debugging the setpoint programmer 216

Data storage 218

211

Debugging

Description of the debugging screen

At a Glance In online mode, the process control debugging screens are used to: l display and animate the loop schema,l display the process alarms and channel faults,l modify the adjustment parameters of each function,l simulate input interface values,l add, delete, and replace calculation functions,l modify configuration parameters of each PID reverse/forward mode type func-

tion,l modify loop controller operation modes.

Illustration This diagram shows a process control loop debugging screen.


Désignation : PROCESSEUR TSX P 57303

Symbole :Fonction :Régulateur :

Mise au point

Régulateur4 - LOOP0 Boucle process

Configuration du DOP

Paramètres boucleMesureConsigneCorrecteur

StandardSimpleChaud/FroidOui

Basse : 0.0

PID

Feed ForwardSortie 1 Analogique

Constante de temps (s)GainSortie

10.0

4484.536

ParamètresFormatFiltrage

FonctionsLOOP 0

Générateur FctAlarmesSimulation

Boucle

1.0

DIAG...

DIAG...

WARNING

Alarmes

DL DH LL L H HH

FF3547

SP163.0

PV5000 44.845

35.47

0.0

28.585OUT 12858

045.0R

L

LL

OUT 2

Haute : 100.0 Echelle de la boucle

212 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Debugging

Description This table describes the main fields of the debugging screen.

Address Description

Alarms If the alarm functions have been configured, all the loop-associated alarms are displayed.l the DIAG LED groups together the serious errors,l the WARNING LED displays warning messages pertaining to the process

control loop function.When the LEDs are on, a window displays error diagnostics messages.A %MWxy.i:Xj word bit is linked to each diagnostic. These bits are detailed in the Fault and diagnostics language objects parts of the chapter describing all the process control language objects (See Process control language ob-jects, p. 295).

Loop 0 Only the configured functions are shown in this tab. Their associated parame-ter values are animated. They can be modified in online mode.

Block schema

The schema shows the intermediary calculation values (corrector input mea-surement, for example). Auto/Manu and Remote/Local changes are made by clicking the mouse once.The associated command values or setpoint values are entered directly in the entry fields.The grayed out entry fields are not active.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 213

Debugging

Modifying the parameters of each loop

Principles The adjustment parameters can be modified in online and offline mode from PL7 software: l task screens,l data editor,l runtime screens,l variable tables,l UNITE server,l ...Modifications do not require global reconfiguration and the save mechanism (initial parameters, current parameters) is applied to the parameters of each process con-trol loop (See Data storage, p. 218).

214 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Debugging

Functional modification of each loop

At a Glance Functions can be added to or deleted from the process control loops in online mode.

Principles The PLC can be in RUN mode during modifications to process control loop func-tions.

After the modifications have been made, the loop starts in a determined state:l If modifications are made at Measurement, Setpoint, and Feed forward branch

level, the loop performs a warm start.l If modifications are made at corrector or output level, the loop restarts using the

initial operating modes which were defined during configuration.

It is not necessary to switch to configuration mode to modify the initial adjustment parameter values Kp, Ti, and Td.

Operating mode:l In debugging mode, all modification of the adjustment parameters from the task

screen updates the current and initial values of these parameters.l For the 3 simple loops loop controller alone, an initial value modification without

configuration parameter modification is not taken into account (for example, add-ing a function).

DANGER

For safety reasons, modifying these functions and some configuration parameters such as extrapolating the generator function from the func-tion, and limiter lopping, etc. require channel reconfiguration.

Failure to observe this precaution will result in death or serious in-jury.

Note: addition or modification of I/O addresses or memory words in online mode is prohibited. Modifying some branches, and replacing a simple setpoint with a ratio setpoint is also prohibited.

Note: the totalizer function can not be added in online mode. Its output is a %MF address.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 215

Debugging

Debugging the setpoint programmer

At a Glance Setpoint programmers have their own debugging screen. They have all the recon-figuration and data saving services in online mode.

Illustration This diagram shows an example of the setpoint programmer in Debugging mode.

Operating principle

Profile execution is displayed dynamically. The information provided is as follows:l the segment number in progress (SEG_OUT),l the iteration number in progress (CUR_ITER),l the execution time of the segment in progress (TIME_SEG),l the total time (TIME_TOTAL).

Notes on the operation:l The TIME_SEG and TIME_TOTAL times change even if the profile is frozen.l The state of monitoring outputs is directly displayed in the channel zone.

Note: any reconfiguration in online mode causes the setpoint programmer to stop operating.


Process value


Symbol:

Ramp

Task:Function:Loop Controller:

80.0

Debug


13.47494

DOP configuration

SPP_1Name:

Segmentation:8-8-8-8-8-8

StageRampStage

50.050.080.080.0

40.020.040.040.0


1234


PROFIL_1 PROFIL_2

Segments ExecutionGuaranteed Dwell Time at threshold 5.0 Deviation on inputon


PROFIL_3 PROFIL_4 PROFIL_5 PROFIL_6

DIAG...

DIAG...

WARNING76543210

10.78006

1 1 1

10.78006Setpoint Total time elapsedProfile Segment

Time elapsed in current segmentNo repetition

Current

216 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Debugging

l Each profile can be controlled directly from the command button located in the tab.

l When the profile is frozen, the %MFxy.i.20 setpoint values and control outputs, %MWxy.I.3:X0 to X7, are not updated during use of NEXT and BACK commands. They are refreshed once the profile has been unfrozen.

l Neither the target setpoint value to be reached (SPi) nor the length of the seg-ment in progress can be modified.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 217

Debugging

Data storage

At a Glance Two data save solutions are provided: l saving adjustment parameters,l the backup application.

Saving adjustment pa-rameters

l All modifications of the adjustment parameters from the PL7 process control screens update the current and initial values.

l Modifying an adjustment parameter from the application or from an animation ta-ble affects the current value but does not modify the initial value. The SAVE_PARAM explicit instruction must be used to save this new value.

l A modification from the XBT-F runtime screens affects the current value but does not modify the initial value. An explicit save command, which is available in these screens, is used for updating.

l On cold restart (%S0) and application loading, the current parameters are re-placed by the initial parameters.

Backup application

Premium PLCs provide the option of saving the application (program and data mem-ory) on a Backup card. The content of this card can reload the RAM memory.

Note: A backup card cannot be used if the Premium PLC is already using a PCM-CIA card.

218 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

9
Operating the process control loops
At a Glance


This Chapter describes the various solutions for operating the process control appli-cation from the dialog terminals.



Section Topic Page

9.1 Operating applications for XBT-F 221

9.2 The XBT-F01 process control screens 230

9.3 XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 process control screens 242

9.4 Exchange tables 256

219

Operating

220 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

9.1 Operating applications for XBT-F

At a Glance


This Section introduces the applications provided with XBT-F terminals, page mod-els and how to use them.



Topic Page

Magelis applications offered 222

Operating page models 224

Browsing in the various view formats 226

How to load an XBT-F application 229

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 221

Operating

Magelis applications offered

At a Glance The disk provided with the XBT-F and TXBT products includes 4 operating applica-tions programmed with the XBT-L1000 tool: l The RFX01MFRUTW.DOP file application intended for XBT-F 5 inches (XBT-

F01 family) configured with the Uni-Telway protocol.l The RFX01MFRFIP.DOP file application intended for XBT-F 5 inches (XBT-F01

family) configured with the Fipio protocol.l The RFX02MFRUTW.DOP file application intended for XBT and TXBT 10 inches

(XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 family) configured with the Uni-Telway protocol.l The RFX02MFRFIP.DOP file application intended for XBT and TXBT 10 inches

(XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 family) configured with the Fipio protocol.

XBT-F01 application

Applications in the process control part include:l 1 monitoring screen,l 1 parameter setting front panel screen,l 1 control screen for each loop (trends),l 1 parameter setting adjustment screen,l 1 parameter setting autotuning screen,l 1 setpoint programmer selection screen,l 1 parameter setting adjustment screen dedicated to setpoint programmers,l 1 parameter setting setpoint programmer screen,l associated alarm pages.

XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 application

Applications in the process control part include:l 1 monitoring screen,l 1 adjustment screen with front panel and parameter setting autotuning (bar

charts),l 1 control screen for each loop (trends),l 1 setpoint programmer selection screen,l 1 parameter setting adjustment screen dedicated to setpoint programmers,l 1 parameter setting setpoint programmer screen,l associated alarm pages.

Note: the process control pages built into the XBT-1000 applications, which are provided on the disk, are guaranteed by the manufacturer to operate correctly as long as they are not modified by the user.

Note: the number of loops used is limited to 8.

222 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Note: the number of loops used is limited to 16.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 223

Operating

Operating page models

At a Glance All the operating pages are designed from the same presentation model: l An alarm panel at the bottom of the screen indicates the active alarm.l The dynamic function keys perform one function and one function only:

l accessing the adjustment page,l starting autotuning,l browsing,l selecting a loop,l ...

These models can be modified or retrieved to expand the other personal operating pages.

Model of XBT-F01 pages

This diagram describes a model for XBT-F01 pages.

AAAAAAAA LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLAAAAAAHHTRACK REMOTEDLLL

Loop name Loop controller type

State of alarms UnitLocal/Remote Indication

LLL9999

Memory uselog

N° of alarm displayed State of alarm

224 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Model of XBT-F02 pages

This diagram describes a model for XBT-F02 pages.

TRACK REMOTEAAAAAAAA+yyyy. y AAAAAALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII

Loop name

Message regardingautotune diagnostics

Operating mode

Loop controller type

Maximumcurves / bar charts

Indication

Unit

9999 AAAAAAAAAAAAA LLLAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA99999

Memory uselog N° of alarm

displayed Alarm label

System message

Group n°

Indication password

Date / time of terminal

Date / time of alarm state

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 225

Operating

Browsing in the various view formats

At a Glance Dynamic function keys are used to browse between the various view formats.The browsing offered can be modified.

226 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Browsing in an XBT-F01 application

The following diagram illustrates browsing between the screens of an XBT-F01 ap-plication.

Monitoring screen

AT

SPP

N°1

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

TC_0001

TC_0002

TC_0003

Alarm page 1 ON

D

L

L

H

2 ON

10000-

DHH

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

AM

LR

AT

::

:

PVSPOV

96.0065.0031.00

:OV1 31.000-

Front panel screen

Autotuning screen

2 ON

ACTUAL PREVDHH

Sa

Ack

AT

Pr

Ack

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

1.00.00.0

StepTmax (s)Perf

10.0100.0

0.50

:

::

1.00.00.0

::

:

KPTITD

2 ON

DHH

Sa

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

:::

:::

:

1.00.00.00.00.010.00.0

AT



:

:::

::

100.00.00.3095.05.00.0

Adjustment screen

2 ON

DHH

AM

LR

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

96.0065.00

:

:

PVSP

OV

OV1

31.00

31.00

:

:

Control screen

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 227

Operating

Browsing in an XBT-F02 application

The following diagram illustrates browsing between the screens of an XBT-F02 ap-plication.

AAAAAAAA99999 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

ATATATATATATATATATATATATATATAT

RRRRR

RRRRRRRRR

R

Process control

AM

LR

TRACK REMOTELLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

AAAAAAAA

+9999.9 AAAA

1/8

9/16

99999 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

PV:+9999.9SP:+9999.9OV:+9999.9

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA99999 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

9

11

13

10

12

14

16

1/8

15

History curve accessAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAMAGELIS

AM

LR

TRACK REMOTELLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

AAAAAAAA

+9999.9 AAAA

1/8

9/16

99999 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL

PV:+9999.9SP:+9999.9OV:+9999.9

AAAAAAAA

Adjustment Screen

Control screen

Monitoring screen

SPP

228 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

How to load an XBT-F application

How to load the application

This table describes the steps for loading an XBT-F application.

Step Action

1 Open the required application using XBT-L1000 software from the disk provid-ed.

2 Use the XBT-L1000 software Transfer command to load the application in the PCMCIA card of the XBT terminal.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 229

Operating

9.2 The XBT-F01 process control screens

At a Glance


This Section describes the XBT-F01 runtime screens, dedicated to process control.



Topic Page

Monitoring screen 231

Front panel screen 232

Trend screen 233

Parameter adjustment screen 234

Autotuning screen 236

Setpoint programmer selection screen 237

Setpoint programmer runtime screen 238

Setpoint programmer adjustment screen 240

Operating the alarm pages 241

230 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Monitoring screen

At a Glance The monitoring screen is the input point for the process control application. This view provides a summary of all the loops used.

Illustration This diagram shows a monitoring screen.

Description The information displayed for each loop is as follows:l the loop label,l the Auto/Manual operating mode,l autotuning is running (or not),l the sum of the alarms.The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.

Note: No entries can be made from this view.

Note: to optimize communication, loop labels are read only on displaying the screen. This can cause inconsistencies when the data are modified by the PLC. Redisplaying the screen will update the new values. If communication is not limited, data can be configured in cyclic read mode and not in read only mode.

AT

SPP

N°1

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

TC_0001

TC_0002

TC_0003

Alarm page 1 ON

D

L

L

H

Key Description

These dynamic keys are used to select the required loop for the adjustment screens.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 231

Operating

Front panel screen

At a Glance This is a table loop controller view. It is used to globally display a process control loop. From this screen, the loop can be controlled in manual mode and the setpoint in local mode.

Illustration This diagram shows a front panel screen.

Description The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.

Note: the refresh period is 5 seconds. The total save period is 26 minutes.

2 ON

10000-

DHH

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

AM

LR

AT

:::

PVSPOV

96.0065.0031.00

:OV1 31.000-

Key Description

This key is used to access the previous loop.

This key is used to access the next loop.

This key is used to switch the loop into automatic or manual mode. The OV com-mand can be modified.

This key is used to switch the setpoint into Remote or Local mode. The SP com-mand can be modified.

AM

LR

232 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Trend screen

At a Glance This view includes the same level of information as the loop view, as well as display-ing the 4 characteristic trends of the loop. The recent trend history is saved.There is no history management on XBT-F.As with the front panel screen, the command can be controlled in manual mode and the setpoint in local mode.

Illustration This diagram shows a trend screen.


2 ON

DHH

AM

LR

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

96.0065.00

::

PVSP

OV

OV1

31.00

31.00

:

:

Key Description

This key is used to switch the loop into automatic or manual mode.

This key is used to switch the setpoint into Remote or Local mode.

AM

LR

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 233

Operating

Parameter adjustment screen

At a Glance This view is used to adjust the loop controller.

No default password is provided for these adjustment screens. It is always possible to add one using the XBT-L1000 software.

Illustration This diagram shows a parameter adjustment screen.

CAUTION

Loops must only be adjusted by an authorized person.

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equip-ment damage.

Note: Even if the setpoint limiter is not configured, the associated parameters, SP_INF and SP_SUP appear in this adjustment screen. Their modification is not acknowledged. In the PL7 configuration screen, the parameters associated with the setpoint limiter are called SP_MIN and SP_MAX.

2 ON

DHH

Sa

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

:::

:::

:

1.00.00.00.00.010.00.0

AT



:

:::

::

100.00.00.3095.05.00.0

234 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating


Key Description

This key is used to access the previous loop.

This key is used to access the next loop.

This key is used to save the current values of the parameters in the initial values.CAUTION: Saving this does not update the PL7 application in the PC which may be connected.

Sa

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 235

Operating

Autotuning screen

At a Glance This view is dedicated to autotuning and is used to start loop autotuning. It is also used to return to the old parameter values that existed prior to autotuning.

Illustration This diagram shows an autotuning screen.

Description The following table shows the function of the dynamic keys.

Note: the autotuning diagnostics messages are global in the process control chan-nel. They concern only one of the 3 loops of a loop controller with 3 single loops or only one of the 2 loops of a cascade or autoselector loop controller (even if these messages are globally displayed).

2 ON

ACTUAL PREVDHH

Sa

Ack

AT

Pr

Ack

Alarm page 1

AUTO LOCAL

TC_0001

1.00.00.0

StepTmax (s)Perf

10.0100.00.50

::

:

1.00.00.0

:::

KPTITD

Key Description

This key is used to start or stop autotuning.

This key is used to save the current values of the parameters in the initial values.

This key is used to return to the set of previous parameters.

This key is used to acknowledge the diagnostics.

AT

Sa

Pr

Ack

236 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Setpoint programmer selection screen

At a Glance This screen is used to: l Display the various setpoint programmers with the current state (INIT, RUN,

STOP) and if a profile is started, the number of the profile which is running.l Select a setpoint programmer.

Illustration This diagram shows a setpoint programmer selection screen.



N°1

2

SPP_3

SPP_4

SPP_5

Alarm page 1 ON

12345678910

RUN

INIT

STOP

PF 1

PF 1

Key Description

These dynamic keys are used to select the required loop for the adjustment screens. It is also possible to enter the loop number directly.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 237

Operating

Setpoint programmer runtime screen

At a Glance This screen is used to: l select one of the setpoint programmer profiles,l control the selected profile,l display the output values of the profile running,

l segment running,l segment type,l time elapsed,l calculated setpoint,

l display and modify the execution parameters,l SP_O,l threshold,l number of repetitions.

How to perform an action

This table describes the steps to be followed for performing an action from the set-point programmer runtime screen.

Illustration This diagram shows a setpoint programmer runtime screen.

Step Action

1 Select a profile using the MOD key.

2 Press the dynamic key required.Result: a second screen is displayed.

3 To confirm, press the dynamic key associated with the required command.

4 If you wish to return to the runtime screen, press the R1 key.

2

SPP_3

Alarm page 1 ON

SP: 37.5PV: 0.0

Seg time:Tot time:

STOP>>

SPP

SEG

<<

Profile 1RUN 1

Segment: 5 / 16N° Cycle: 1 10 s 74 s

Start: SPSP_O: 10.0Threshold: 2.00

Execute

to infinityRestart on 2

RST

238 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating


Key Description

This dynamic key is used to activate the RUN or STOP command, if a profile is running.

This dynamic key is used to activate the RESET command.

This dynamic key is used to activate the HOLD or DEHOLD command.

This dynamic key is used to activate the Disable/Enable command of the guar-anteed dwell time. This command does not appear when the guaranteed dwell time has not been configured on the current profile.

This dynamic key is used to activate the NEXT command.

This dynamic key is used to activate the BACK command.

This dynamic key is used to access the setpoint programmer selection screen.

This dynamic key is used to access the setpoint programmer adjustment screen.

STOP

RST

SPP

SEG

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 239

Operating

Setpoint programmer adjustment screen

At a Glance This screen is used to display and modify the setpoint and time (or ramp) values of the segments from the selected profile.

Illustration This diagram shows a setpoint programmer adjustment screen.


2

SPP_3

Alarm page 1 ON

SPP

Profile 1

Segments used: 16

12345678

Sa

100.0100.020.020.050.050.080.080.0

20.05.0

200.00.10.25.05.04.0

p/ss

p/mmmsss

/- =

/- =

/-/

- =

SY SP VAL Unit Type

Key Description

These dynamic keys are used to display the next/previous segments. They are active when the number of segments from the selected profile is greater than the number of displayable segments.

This dynamic key is used to save the parameters. This command must be con-firmed.Sa

240 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Operating the alarm pages

At a Glance The alarm pages and their management are identical to the XBT alarm pages (for further details, see the XBT-L1000 software documentation). In the applications of-fered, all the process control alarms are in the same group.

Alarm types There are 6 alarm types per process control loop:l process value very high threshold overflow,l process value high threshold overflow,l process value low threshold overflow,l process value very low threshold overflow,l high deviation overflow between process value and setpoint,l low deviation overflow between process value and setpoint.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 241

Operating

9.3 XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 process control screens

At a Glance


This Section describes the XBT-F02 and TXBT-F02 runtime screens, dedicated to process control.



Topic Page

Monitoring screen 243

Control screen 245

Adjustment screen 247

Setpoint programmer selection screen 249

Setpoint programmer runtime screen 251

Setpoint programmer adjustment screen 254

Operating the alarm pages 255

242 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Monitoring screen

At a Glance The monitoring screen is the input point for the process control application. This view provides a summary of all the loops used.

Illustration This diagram shows a monitoring screen.

Note: No entries can be made from this view.


CONTROL LOOP SELECTION1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

TC_0001

TC_0002

TC_0003

D

D

L

H

Loop 1 Alarm(s)21

SPPSELECT

N°1

06/05/98 15 :01 :29 ON06/05/1998 15 : 13

1/8

9/16

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 243

Operating

Description The information displayed for each loop is as follows:l the loop label,l the Auto/Manual operating mode,l autotuning is running (or not),l the sum of the alarms.

The following table shows the function of the dynamic selection keys.

Key Description

These dynamic keys are used to select the required loop for the adjustment screens.

244 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Control screen

At a Glance This screen is used to globally display a process control loop. The loop can be con-trolled in manual mode and the setpoint in local mode.This screen also serves:l as the adjustment screen,l as the autotuning screen,

No default password is provided for these adjustment screens. It is always possible to add one using the XBT-L1000 software.

CAUTION

Loops must only be adjusted by an authorized person.

Failure to observe this precaution can result in injury or equip-ment damage.

Note: the autotuning diagnostics messages are global in the process control chan-nel. They concern only one of the 3 loops of a loop controller with 3 single loops or only one of the 2 loops of a cascade or autoselector loop controller (even if these messages are globally displayed).

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 245

Operating

Illustration This diagram shows a control screen.


Loop 1 Alarm(s)22

06/05/98 15 :01 :29 ON06/05/1998 15 : 41

1/8

9/16

AM

LR

PV:SP:OV:

OV1:


26mn 20mn 10mn 0.060.020.040.0

40.0

DH

Key Description

This key is used to switch the loop into automatic or manual mode.

This key is used to switch the setpoint into Remote or Local mode.

AM

LR

246 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Adjustment screen

At a Glance This screen is used to globally display a process control loop. It is used to control the loop in manual mode and the setpoint in local.The recent change history of the process value, the setpoint and the commands is outlined on the screen.

Illustration This diagram shows an adjustment screen.

Note: the refresh period is 5 seconds. The total save period is 26 minutes.

Note: Even if the setpoint limiter is not configured, the associated parameters, SP_INF and SP_SUP appear in this adjustment screen. Their modification is not acknowledged. In the PL7 configuration screen, the parameters associated with the setpoint limiter are called SP_MIN and SP_MAX.

Loop 1 Alarm(s)22

06/05/98 15 :01 :29 ON06/05/1998 15 : 41

1/8

9/16

AM

LR

PV:SP:OV:

OV1:


26mn 20mn 10mn 0.060.020.040.0

40.0

DH

Sa

Pr

AT

Ack

KPTI (s)TD (s)O_ BIASDBANDINTBNDKD

:::::::

1.00.00.00.00.00.0

10.0

KP PrTI PrTD PrATSTEPATTMAXATPERF

::::::

1.00.00.0

10.0100.0

0.50

SP_SUPSP_INFTS (s)PV_HPV_LORATE 1

::::::

100.00.0

0.3095.0.

5.00.0

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 247

Operating


Key Description

This key is used to switch the loop into automatic or manual mode. The OV com-mand can be modified.

This key is used to switch the setpoint into Remote or Local mode. The SP com-mand can be modified.

This key is used to start or stop autotuning.

This key is used to return to the set of previous parameters.

This key is used to acknowledge the diagnostics.

AM

LR

AT

Pr

ACK

248 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Setpoint programmer selection screen

At a Glance This screen is used to: l Display the various setpoint programmers with the current state (INIT, RUN,

STOP) and if a profile is started, the number of the profile which is running.l Select a setpoint programmer.

Illustration This diagram shows a setpoint programmer selection screen.


Loop 1 Alarm(s)223

06/05/98 15 :01 :29 ON06/05/1998 15 : 50

SETPOINT PROGRAMMER SELECTION

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

SPP_3

SPP_4

SPP_5

N°1

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 249

Operating


Key Description

These dynamic keys are used to select the required loop for the adjustment screens. It is also possible to enter the loop number directly.

250 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Setpoint programmer runtime screen

At a Glance This screen is used to: l select one of the setpoint programmer profiles,l control the selected profile,l display the output values of the profile running,

l segment running,l segment type,l time elapsed,l calculated setpoint,

l display and modify the execution parameters,l SP_O,l threshold,l number of repetitions.

How to perform an action

This table describes the steps to be followed for performing an action from the set-point programmer runtime screen.

Step Action

1 Select a profile using the MOD key.

2 Press the dynamic key required.Result: a second screen is displayed.

3 To confirm, press the dynamic key associated with the required command.

4 If you wish to return to the runtime screen, press the R1 key.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 251

Operating

Illustration This diagram shows a setpoint programmer runtime screen.


Loop 1 Alarm (s)224

06/05/98 15 :01 :29 ON06 / 05 / 1998 15 : 55

PROFILE N° 1

SPPSEGMENT

SPPSELECT

STOP

RST

SPP_3

RUN Profile 1 GUARANTEED DWELL TIME FREEZE

Start: SP

SP_INF: 10.00

THRESHOLD: 2.00

Repetition:

Execute to infinity

Resume at segment n° 2

SP : 35.25

PV : 0.00

Segment time:

Total time :

6 sec

1994 sec

Segment: 5 / 16

N° Cycle: 1

Key Description

This dynamic key is used to activate the RUN or STOP command, if a profile is running.

This dynamic key is used to activate the RESET command.

This dynamic key is used to activate the HOLD or DEHOLD command.

This dynamic key is used to activate the Disable/Enable command of the guar-anteed dwell time. This command does not appear when the guaranteed dwell time has not been configured on the current profile.

This dynamic key is used to activate the NEXT command.

STOP

RST

252 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

This dynamic key is used to activate the BACK command.

This dynamic key is used to access the setpoint programmer selection screen.

This dynamic key is used to access the setpoint programmer adjustment screen.

Key Description

SPPSEGMENT

SPPSELECT

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 253

Operating

Setpoint programmer adjustment screen

At a Glance This screen is used to display and modify the setpoint and time (or ramp) values of the segments from the selected profile.

Illustration This diagram shows a setpoint programmer adjustment screen.


SPPSELECT

Sa

2506 / 05 / 98Loop 1 Alarm(s)2 15:01:29

06 / 05 / 1998 15:57ON

SPP_3 Profile n°1

GUARANTEED DWELL TIME FREEZERUN Profile 1

Segments used: 16

SEGMENT SP UNITTYPEVAL1

2345

6

78

910

12 11

13141516

100.0

100.0

20.020.050.050.0

80.080.0

30.030.090.0

90.020.020.0

45.045.0

20.00

5.00

200.00

0.200.10

5.00

5.004.00

4.000.105.00

5.0010.000.204.005.00

phy/s

s

phy/mmm

ss

s

ms

s

ss

m

ss

Ramp

Step =Ramp

Step =RampStep

RampStep =

RampStep =RampStep

RampStep

Ramp

Step

Key Description

These dynamic keys are used to display the next/previous segments. They are active when the number of segments from the selected profile is greater than the number of displayable segments.

This dynamic key is used to save the parameters. This command must be con-firmed.Sa

254 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Operating the alarm pages

At a Glance The alarm pages and their management are identical to the XBT alarm pages (for further details, see the XBT-L1000 software documentation). In the applications of-fered, all the process control alarms are in the same group.

Alarm types There are 6 alarm types per process control loop:l process value very high threshold overflow,l process value high threshold overflow,l process value low threshold overflow,l process value very low threshold overflow,l high deviation overflow between process value and setpoint,l low deviation overflow between process value and setpoint.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 255

Operating

9.4 Exchange tables

At a Glance


This Section describes the operating exchange tables.



Topic Page

Parameter setting zone for a loop 257

Periodic data zone 263

Alarm zone (loop only) 264

XBT specific zone 265

Multiplexing parameter setting zone for a setpoint programmer 268

Default addresses 272

256 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Parameter setting zone for a loop

Description This zone is used by the front panel, adjustment, and autotuning screen pages (for an XBT-F01) and by the adjustment screen page (for an XBT-F02). The first 4 words (not multiplexing) are used by the monitoring pages.

Rank Parameter Exchange

%MWn+0 Number of selected loop (1 word)From 0 to 29. This word is used to select the loop managed by the parameter setting zone if the XBT specific table is not con-figured. Otherwise, it is not used.This word is controlled according to word %MWn+5, or is written directly (an overflow from the last or first loop causes a return to the first or last loop respectively). It is set to 0 on initialization.

API <-> XBT

%MWn+1 Identifier (1 word) API -> XBT

%MWn+2 Bar chart number indicator (1 double word)Each bit is associated to a loop. A bit at 0 means that the loop has only one output. A bit at 1 means that the loop has 2 out-puts.

API -> XBT

%MWn+4 Write access prohibited (1 word)Write access to this zone is only taken into account by the PLCs if this word is at 0. This word is managed by the user application (Default = 0)

API -> XBT

%MWn+5 Increment/Decrement loop number (1 word) The dynamic buttons in XBT pulse-based mode set to 1 the word bits commanding loop number incrementation or decre-mentation. X0: loop number incrementation (XBT-F01)X1: loop number decrementation (XBT-F01)X2: loop number incrementation (XBT-F02)X3: loop number decrementation (XBT-F02)X15: loop change storage (internal management). These bits are processed by the channel containing the currently selected loop. The bit is taken into account on rising edge.

API <-> XBT

API Internal

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 257

Operating

%MWn+6 Command word for "toggle" buttons (1 word) Each word bit is used to send a command to the selected loop, on change of state. This word is not used. X0: 0 = switch to local setpoint; 1 = switch to remote setpointX1: 0 = switch to manual mode; 1 = switch to automatic modeX2: 0 = autotuning stop; 1 = autotuning start X3: return to previ-ous adjustmentX4: acknowledging autotuning diagnosticsX5: 0 = remote 1 setpoint selection; 1 = remote 2 setpoint selec-tionX6: 0 = deactivation of RAISE1 output; 1= activation of RAISE1 outputX7: 0 = deactivation of LOWER1 output; 1= activation of LOWER1 outputX15: Saving parametersThe selected loop takes the command into account on rising or falling edge. The associated buttons are in "toggle" mode. The word is updated by the PLC according to the current loop state (for bits enabling 2 distinct commands to be sent).

API <-> XBT

%MWn+7 Command word for pulse-based buttons (1 word)Each word bit is used to send a command to the selected loop. The first 4 bits are associated with the dynamic buttons. The following are for opening: X0: Changing setpoint mode(remote -> local or local -> remote depending on current mode) X1: operating mode change(manual -> auto or auto -> manual depending on current oper-ating mode) X2: autotuning start or stop, depending on whether or not auto-tuning is runningX3: return to previous adjustmentX4: acknowledging autotuning diagnosticsX5: selecting remote 1 setpointX6: selecting remote 2 setpointX7: activating the RAISE1 outputX8: deactivating the RAISE1 outputX9: activating the LOWER1 outputX10: deactivating the LOWER1 outputX15: Saving selected loop parameters takes the command into account on rising edge. Buttons are in pulse-based mode.

API <- XBT

%MWn+8 Loop label (8 bytes) Updating by the loop on selection of this

API -> XBT


258 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

%MWn+12 Loop unit (6 bytes)Updating by the loop on selection of this

API -> XBT

%MWn+15 Loop identifier (1 word) 1H: single/process loop: nothing2H: master cascade: CASCADE M3H: slave cascade: CASCADE S4H: autoselector, main loop: AUTOSELECTOR 05H: autoselector, restriction: AUTOSELECTOR 1Updating by the loop on selection of this. Serves to display the type of loop in the various screens.

API -> XBT

%MWn+16 Loop controller identifier (1 word) xx1H: PIDxx2H: single PIDxx3H: ON OFF 2 statesxx4H: ON OFF 3 statesxx5H: IMCUpdating by the loop on selection of this.

API -> XBT

%MWn+17 Alarm word (1 word) Each bit defines a different alarm:X0: STS_SIGMA_ALA (sum of the alarms)X1: STS_HH (process value very high threshold exceeded)X2: STS_H (process value high threshold exceeded)X3: STS_L (process value low threshold exceeded)X4: STS_LL (process value very low threshold exceeded)X5: STS_DEV_H (positive deviation threshold exceeded)X6: STS_DEV_L (negative deviation threshold exceeded)X14: AT_NON_AUTORISEX15: NB_BARGRAPHES_OUT (0 = 1 bar chart; 1 = 2 bar chart)This word is updated at every cycle

API -> XBT

%MWn+18 PV in the scale 0-10000 (1 word) API -> XBT

%MWn+19 SP in the scale 0-10000 (1 word) API -> XBT

%MWn+20 OUT1 in the scale 0-10000 (1 word) API -> XBT

%MWn+21 OUT2 in the scale 0-10000 (1 word) API -> XBT

%MWn+22 OUT_MAN API <-> XBT

%MWn+24 PV API -> XBT

%MWn+26 SP API <-> XBT

%MWn+28 OUT1 API -> XBT

%MWn+30 OUT2 API -> XBT


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 259

Operating

%MWn+32 STATUS1X0: STS_M_A (0 = manual, 1 = auto)X1: STS_TR_S1 (1 = tracking)X2: STS_AT_RUNNING (1 = autotuning running)X3: STS_R_L (0 = remote, 1 = local)X4: STS_RAISE1 (output 1 from ON OFF or from SERVO)X5: STS_LOWER1 (output 2 from ON OFF 3 states or from SERVO)X6: STS_RAISE2 (output 1 from SERVO2)X7: STS_LOWER2 (output 2 from SERVO2)X8: STS_R1_R2 (0 = SP1 is selected, 1 = SP2 is selected)X9: STS_AS (1 = autoselector in auto-selection mode)X10: STS_DIR1 (1 = autoselector in direct main loop mode)X11: STS_DIR2 (1 = autoselector in direct secondary loop mode)X12: STS_SEL_PID1 (0 = PID2 output selected, 1 = PID1 output selected)

API -> XBT

%MWn+33 STATUS2 = autotuning diagnosticsX0 = autotuning running (STS_AT_RUNNING)X1 = autotuning aborted (by user or program) (AT_ABORTED)X2 = AT: parameter error (parameter incorrect or value modifi-cation during autotuning) (AT_ERR_PWF_OR_SYS_FAILURE)X3 = AT: power outage (or system error) (AT_ERR_PWF_OR_SYS_FAILURE)X4 = AT: PV or OV saturation (AT_ERR_SATUR)X5 = AT: deviation too small (AT_ERR_DV_TOO_SMALL)X6 = AT: sub-sampling (AT_ERR_TSAMP_HIGH)X7 = AT: inconsistent response (AT_ERR_INCONSISTENT_RESPONSE)X8 = AT: PV not stable on init (AT_ERR_NOT_STAB_INIT)X9 = AT: TMAX too small (AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_SMALL)X10 = AT: noise too high (AT_ERR_NOISE_TOO_HIGH)X11 = AT_TMAX too high (AT_ERR_TMAX_TOO_HIGH)X12 = AT: sub-absorption process (AT_WARN_OVERSHOOT)X13 = AT: not phase min (AT_WARN_UNDERSHOOT)X14 = AT: unsymmetrical process (AT_WARN_UNSYMETRICAL_PLANT)X15 = AT: integrating process (AT_WARN_INTEGRATING_PLANT)

API -> XBT

%MWn+34 SPEED_LIM_OUTRefreshes at every cycle


260 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

%MWn+36to%MWn+75

Loop controller adjustment zone (20 floating point words) (*)%MWn+36: T_ECH, %MWn+38: OUT1_INF (read-only),%MWn+40: OUT1_SUP (read-only),%MWn+42: SP_INF,%MWn+44: SP_SUP,%MWn+46: OUT2_INF (read-only),%MWn+48: OUT2_SUP (read-only),%MWn+50: PV_INF (read only), %MWn+52: PV_SUP (read only),%MWn+54: KP (PID) / ONOFF_L (ON OFF) / KS (IMC),%MWn+56: TI (PID) / ONOFF_H (ON OFF) / OL_TIME (IMC),%MWn+58: TD (PID) / HYST (ON OFF 3 states) / T_DELAY (IMC),%MWn+60: OUTBIAS (PID) / CL_PERF (IMC),%MWn+62: INT_BAND (PID),%MWn+64: DBAND (PID, IMC)%MWn+66: KD (PID except single PID)%MWn+68: OUTRATE1 (PID, IMC),%MWn+70: OUTRATE2,%MWn+72: PV_L,%MWn+74: PV_H

API <-> XBT

%MWn+76to%MWn+87

Autotuning adjustment zone (6 floating point words) (*)%MWn+76: AT_STEP, %MWn+78: AT_TMAX, %MWn+80: AT_PERF, %MWn+82: KP_PREV (PID) / KS_PREV (IMC), (read only)%MWn+84: TI_PREV (PID) / T1_PREV (IMC), (read only)%MWn+86: TD_PREV (PID) / T_DELAY_PREV (IMC) (read only)

This zone is only managed if the autotuning function exists (PID, IMC).

API <-> XBT


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 261

Operating

(*): Zone tested by checksum every second at start of processing. When there is a change, the modified parameters are written in the loop parameters. The entire zone is updated every second at the end of processing, from the loop parameters.

Parameter ad-justment zone

The parameter adjustment zones have the same structure as the parameter setting zones.

l Several loop controllers are configured with the same address. Operation is then identical to that of the parameter setting zone.

l Each loop controller is configured with an independent address (with no zone overlap). This is used to display many loop controllers at the same time.

%MWn+88to%MWn+103

Output and alarm adjustment zone (8 floating point words) (*)%MWn+88: OUT1_TH1,%MWn+90: OUT1_TH2,%MWn+92: OUT2_TH1,%MWn+94: OUT2_TH2,%MWn+96: PV_LL,%MWn+98: PV_HH,%MWn+100: DEV_L,%MWn+102: DEV_H

API <-> XBT


262 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

Periodic data zone

Description This zone is used by the Trend screens.

This table takes up 12 x words (number of loops) configured for the XBT, up to a maximum of 192 words (%MW) for 16 loops.


%MWn+0to%MWn+11

Loop 1 data (6 floating point words)%MWn+0: OUT_MAN,%MWn+2: PV, %MWn+4: SP, %MWn+6: OUT1, %MWn+8: OUT2, %MWn+10: STATUS1%MWn+11: STATUS2The STATUS words are identical to those in the parameter set-ting zone. This zone is updated at every cycle.

API -> XBT

%MWn+12 Loop 2 data (6 floating point words) API -> XBT

%MWn+24 Etc, depending on the number of loops configured for the XBT

API -> XBT

Note: The OUT1 and OUT2 fields can be found in both the parameter setting zone and in the periodic zone. If the loop only has one output, the output is in OUT1 and the associated bar chart is magenta. When there is Heat/Cool, the cold output is stored in OUT2 and the warm output in OUT1. Process control channel variables are then reversed. This enables the warm output to be displayed in magenta and the cold output in blue.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 263

Operating

Alarm zone (loop only)

Description This zone is situated in the XBT terminal dialog zone.


%MWn+0 Loop 1 alarm word (1 byte)Each bit defines a different alarm:X0: STS_SIGMA_ALA (sum of the alarms)X1: STS_HH (process value very high threshold exceeded)X2: STS_H (process value high threshold exceeded)X3: STS_L (process value low threshold exceeded)X4: STS_LL (process value very low threshold exceeded)X5: STS_DEV_H (positive deviation threshold exceeded)X6: STS_DEV_L (negative deviation threshold exceeded)This word is updated at every cycle. It is identical to that of the parameter setting zone.

API -> XBT

%MWn+24 Loop 2 data (1 byte) API -> XBT

%MWn+25 Etc, depending on the number of loops configured for the XBT

API -> XBT

264 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

XBT specific zone

Description This zone


%MWn+0 Number of selected loop (1 word)From 0 to 29. This number defines the loop managed by the parameter setting zone.This word is controlled according to word %MWn+5 from the parameter setting zone (exceeding the last or first loop causes a return to the first or last loop respectively). It is set at 0 on initialization. This word can also be written directly.

API <-> XBT

%MWn+1 Loop 1 monitoring screen state (1 word).This word is used to display a list of possible states:X0: 0 = the loop does not exist (the entire word is zero in this case); 1 = the loop existsX1: 0 = loop in manual mode; 1 = loop in automatic modeX2: high alarm on process valueX3: low alarm on process valueX4: alarm on deviation

Note: X2 and X3 are exclusive.

API -> XBT

%MWn+2 Loop 2 monitoring screen state (1 word)etc, up to loop 16

API -> XBT

%MWn+17 Loop 1 label (8 bytes)Update on initialization

API -> XBT

%MWn+21 Loop 2 label (8 bytes))Update on initializationetc, up to loop 16

API -> XBT

%MWn+81 Loop 1 unit (6 bytes)Update on initialization

API -> XBT

%MWn+84 Loop 1 identifier (1 word)1H: single/process loop: nothing2H: master cascade: CASCADE M3H: slave cascade: CASCADE S4H: autoselector, main loop: AUTOSELECTOR 05H: auto-selector, restriction: AUTOSELECTOR 1Update on loop selection

API -> XBT

%MWn+85to%MWn+88

Loop 1 scale parameters (2 floating points)%MWn+85: PV_INF%MWn+87: PV_SUP

API -> XBT

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 265

Operating

%MWn+89 Command word for loop 1 "toggle" buttons (1 word)Each word bit is used to send a command to the selected loop, on change of state. X0: 0 = switch to local setpoint; 1 = switch to remote setpointX1: 0 = switch to manual mode; 1 = switch to automatic modeX2: 0 = autotuning stop; 1 = autotuning start)X3: return to previous adjustmentX4: acknowledging autotuning diagnosticsX5: 0 = remote 1 setpoint selection; 1 = remote 2 setpoint se-lectionX6: 0 = deactivation of RAISE1 output; 1= activation of RAISE1 outputX7: 0 = deactivation of LOWER1 output; 1 = activation of LOWER1 outputX15: Saving parametersThe loop takes the command into account on rising or falling edge. The associated buttons are in "toggle" mode. The word is updated by the PLC according to the current loop state (for bits enabling 2 distinct commands to be sent).

API <-> XBT

%MWn+90 Command word for loop 1 pulse-based buttons (1 word)Each word bit is used to send a command to the selected loop. The first 4 bits are associated with the dynamic buttons. The following are for opening :X0: Setpoint mode change (remote -> local or local -> remote depending on current mode)X1: operating mode change (manual -> auto or auto -> manual depending on current operating mode)X2: autotuning start or stop, depending on whether or not au-totuning is runningX3: return to previous adjustmentX4: acknowledging autotuning diagnosticsX5: selecting remote 1 setpointX6: selecting remote 2 setpointX7: activating the RAISE1 outputX8: deactivating the RAISE1 outputX9: activating the LOWER1 outputX10: deactivating the LOWER1 outputX15: Saving parametersThe loop takes the command into account on rising or falling edge. Buttons are in pulse-based mode.

API <- XBT


266 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

This table takes up 281 words, independently of the number of loops and SPPs con-figured.

%MWn+91...

Loop 2 unit (6 bytes)Loop 2 identifier (1 word)Loop 2 scale parameters (2 floating points)Command word for loop 2 "toggle" buttons (1 word)Command word for loop 2 pulse-based buttons (1 word)etc, up to loop 16

API <-> XBT

%MWn+241 Programmer 1 label (8 bytes) API -> XBT

%MWn+245 SPP2 label (8 bytes) etc, up to loop 16 API -> XBT


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 267

Operating

Multiplexing parameter setting zone for a setpoint programmer

Description This table describes the multiplexing parameters for a setpoint programmer.

Address Default value Description

%MW3350 Configuration Configured SPPs

%MW3351 0 Write access prohibited.Write access to this zone is only taken into account if this word is at 0.

%MW3352 0 SPP number increment/decrement (X0, X1 bits) and dis-played segment packet number increment/decrement (X2, X3 bits)

%MW3353 0 SPP number selected (0: first SPP).

%MW3354 1 CUR_PF

%MW3355 1 SEG_OUT

%MW3356 0 CUR_ITER

%MW3357 Configuring 1st SPP profile 1

NB_RT_PFi


Profile configuration:%MW3358:X0: guaranteed dwell time%MW3358:X1 to X2: holding type (not used),%MW3358:X3: start (0: SP; 1: PV),%MW3358:X4: continuous retries (1),%MW3358:X5: start of retries (0: SP).

%MW3359 %MW3359:X9 = 1%MW3359:X13 = 1

Profile state:%MW3359:X0 to X7: discrete outputs%MW3359:X8: HOLD_PF%MW3359:X9: INIT%MW3359:X10: RUN%MW3359:X11: STOP%MW3359:X12: HOLD_PAG%MW3359:X13: this bit is used to display the execution parameters of the displayed profile.


Number of segments used


Restart segment number for retries

%MF3362 0.0 SP

%MF3364 No object PV

%MF3366 0.0 TOTAL_TIME

268 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating

%MF3368 0.0 CUR_TIME

%MF3370 Configuring 1st SPP profile 1

THLD_PFi

%MF3372 Configuring 1st SPP profile 1

SP0_PFi

%MW3374 1 Displayed profile selection

%MW3375 0 Command word:Pulse-based commands%MW3375:X0: RESET%MW3375:X1: START / STOP%MW3375:X2: HOLD_PF / DEHOLD_PF%MW3375:X3: NEXT_SG%MW3375:X4: BACK_SG%MW3375:X5: HOLD_PAG / DEHOLD_PAG%MW3375:X6: SAVE_PARAM

"Toggle" commands%MW3375:X8: RESET%MW3375:X9: START / STOP%MW3375:X10: HOLD_PF / DEHOLD_PF(1 = HOLD_PF; 0 = DEHOLD_PF)%MW3375:X11: NEXT_SG%MW3375:X12: BACK_SG%MW3375:X13: HOLD_PAG / DEHOLD_PAG(1 = HOLD_PAG; 0 = DEHOLD_PAG)%MW3375:X15: SAVE_PARAM

%MW3376 1 Displayed profile number (from 1 to 6)


Number of segments in displayed profile

%MF3378to%MF3440

Configuring 1st SPP profile 1

32%MF exchange zone of segments from the displayed profile (SPi, VALi, SPi+1, VALi+1, ...)


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 269

Operating

%MW3442to%MW3449

Configuration Configuration (8 %MWi, or 16 x 8 bits)Segment 1: %MW3442:X0 (1: second)%MW3442:X1 (1: minute)%MW3442:X2 (1: hour)%MW3442:X3 (1: physical unit)%MW3442:X4 (ramp/dwell)%MW3442:X5 (guaranteed dwell time)Segment 2: %MW3442:X8 (1: second)%MW3442:X9 (1: minute)%MW3442:X10 (1: hour)%MW3442:X11 (1: physical unit)%MW3442:X12 (ramp/dwell)%MW3442:X13 (guaranteed dwell time)Segment 3: %MW3443:X0 (1: second)%MW3443:X1 (1: minute)%MW3443:X2 (1: hour)%MW3443:X3 (1: physical unit)%MW3443:X4 (ramp/dwell)%MW3443:X5 (guaranteed dwell time)Segment 4: %MW3443:X8 (1: second), …

%MW3450 Label of selected SPP (4%MWi)

%MW3454 Configuration Current segment type:X3 X2 X1 define the type of guaranteed dwell time1 0 0 maintain on input deviation1 0 1 maintain on high deviation1 1 0 maintain on low deviation1 1 1 maintain on deviationX4 = 1 DwellX5 = 1 Rising rampX6 = 1 Falling ramp

%MW3455 %MW3455:X4 = 1 SPP1 state:%MW3455:X4 = 1 INIT%MW3455:X5 = 1 RUN%MW3455:X6 = 1 STOP

%MW3456 0 SPP1 Number of profile running:0 : (no profile running) or 1 to 6


270 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating


%MW3458 0 SPP2 Number of profile running: 0 : (no profile running) or 1 to 6

... ... ...


%MW3474 0 SPP10 Number of profile running: 0 : (no profile running) or 1 to 6


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 271

Operating

Default addresses

Description This table describes:

Table Start address End address Max. size (%MW)

Alarm table %MW3228 %MW3242 15

Programmer parameter setting zone %MW3350 %MW3474 125

Loop periodic zone %MW3500 %MW3691 192

Loop adjustment zone %MW3700 %MW3803 104

XBT zone %MW3810 %MW4090 281

Note: During modification of the dialog zone in XBT-L1000, the start address of this zone must be adjusted in order for the alarm zone start address to remain %MW3228.

272 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

10
Operating modes
At a Glance


This Chapter describes the process control operating modes: PLC and control loop operating modes.



Section Topic Page

10.1 Operating process control channels 275

10.2 Handling process control operations according to PLC operat-ing mode

279

10.3 Common operating modes for process control loops 281

10.4 Operating modes for each process control loop 286

273

Operating modes

274 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

10.1 Operating process control channels

At a Glance


This section describes how process control handling is distributed and synchronized for the best possible results in processor loading.



Topic Page

Distribution of process control handling 276

Synchronizing pre- and post- processing 277

Multitasking application 278

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 275

Operating modes

Distribution of process control handling

MAST task and loop sampling

The processing task period and the control loop sampling periods are different.By default, the MAST task lasts 20 ms, while the process control channel sampling times are 300 ms.

Optimizing processor loading

To optimize processor loading, the periodic processing of different process control channels is distributed over several task cycles.Distribution of the processing in this way is an entirely automatic operation and does not require programming.The order of loop distribution over the task cycles follows the order in which the loops were created.

Example Let there be 18 loops configured in the following manner:l 14 loops configured to 300 ms (loops 1 to 14),l 2 loops configured to 200 ms (loops 15 and 16),l 2 loops configured to 100 ms (loops 17 and 18).Distribution of the processing operation:

seqReg

seq seq seq seq seq seq seqReg Reg Reg Reg Reg Reg RegMAST

Tn+2 = 150msTn = 50msTn+1 = 100ms Tn+3 = 200ms Tn+5 = 300ms Tn+7 = 400ms

Tn+4 = 250ms Tn+6 = 350ms

Loops 17, 18+ loops 1, 2, 3

Loops 17, 18+ loops 7, 8

Loops 17, 18+ loops 11, 12

Loops 17, 18+ loops 1, 2, 3

Loops 15, 16+ loops 4, 5, 6

Loops 9, 10 Loops 15, 16+ loops 13, 14

276 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Synchronizing pre- and post- processing

Trigger bits If you wish to closely synchronize the sequential processing with the periodical ex-ecution of each control loop, for each loop with 2 bits contained in the status words there is:l STS_TOP_NEXT_CYCLE: pre-processing trigger bit.l STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE: post-processing trigger bit.These two bits can act as enabling conditions for processing operations written in structured text or ladder language.

Example This synchronization can be useful for Stop/Run operating modes, or for variation or compensation calculations.The pre-processing status bit is on 1 during the task cycle before the control pro-cessing cycle.The post-processing status bit is on 1 during the entire task cycle which follows the control handling cycle.To correctly synchronize the sequential handling with the process control calcula-tions, processing operations must be integrated within the same task.In manual or tracking mode, the command is generated in all processing cycles. These synchronizing bits are always on 1 while in these modes.For example, Loop on 200 ms with a MAST task on 50 ms:

STS_TOP_NEXT_CYCLE

STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE

250 300 350 400 450 500

10

10

MAST REGREG

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 277

Operating modes

Multitasking application

Optimum functioning level

For the optimum and determinist operating level, in a given control channel you are advised to assign to the same task: l Inputs/outputs channels,l Sequential pre- and post processing,l Sequential processing managing the PLC’s operating modes.

278 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

10.2 Handling process control operations according to PLC operating mode

Handling process control operations according to the PLC operating mode

At a Glance PLC behavior can be altered either by user intervention or by a fault. In this case, the process control channels follow a preset downgraded functioning mode. The fol-lowing PLC operating modes can alter process control operations.

PLC power-up On PLC power-up, the system searches for a valid application in the user memory space.If the application is valid, the system changes to a state of configuration and each process control channel is called. The channel context is then set on initial values which can be used on application.If the application is not valid, the system changes to standby mode to wait for a re-configuration request.

Processor in RUN mode

In RUN mode, the processor carries out successively on each cycle:l The reading of input channels,l The execution of setpoint programs,l The execution of process control loops,l The processing of sequential programming,l The writing of outputs.All process control channels are called in each task cycle:l Calculation of the process value, (PV), calculation of the Feed Forward

(OUT_FF), alarm management, operating modes, setpoint programmers and generation of Manu or Tracking mode commands are all carried out on each cy-cle.

l Loop commands in Auto mode are generated and setpoints are calculated during the sampling period.

Switch to STOP mode

The process control channels do not directly initiate the STOP mode for the proces-sor or the task. Switching to STOP mode means that all the current functions in progress stop.The process control channels are no longer carried out. They refuse all commands (in Auto or Manu, etc.). The calculation results remain in their current state. Physical outputs take on the fallback value set in the configuration.Inputs are always refreshed. Parameters may therefore be altered. The validity check is carried out on the next start-up.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 279

Operating modes

Cold restart A cold restart can be initiated in several ways:l Changing the cartridge (cold start),l A reconfiguration ( by loading a program, transferring a new application, etc.),l A new configuration.A cold restart is indicated by the %S0 system bit.The process control channels monitor their configuration, and initialize their param-eters and status as from the first cycle. Algorithm processing is executed from the second cycle.All commands generated in a sequential operation from the first cycle are accepted, except for orders to track or autotune on the loop controller. The command is re-fused.

Warm restart A warm restart happens on a power cut followed by a power restart. At the moment of the power cut, parameters are saved. The system and application contexts (e.g. application data, operating modes) are retained.Any autotuning in progress will be aborted. The process control channels are carried out as from the first cycle.

280 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

10.3 Common operating modes for process control loops

At a Glance


This Section describes the operating modes which are common to all process con-trol loops: loop control in manual mode, starting autotuning, execution in Tracking mode, etc.



Topic Page

Loop execution in manual and automatic modes 282

Autotuning and Tracking mode 283

Auto / Manual and Manual / Auto switching 284

Behavior of loops during I/O errors 285

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 281

Operating modes

Loop execution in manual and automatic modes

Control in manual mode

Manual mode enables the user to directly apply a value to the loop controller output.This mode can be selected from the PL7 Debug screens. It can also be controlled from the different XBT-F terminal screens.The user can switch to manual mode by sending a command. When this command is accepted, manual mode is indicated by the status bit STS_AUTO_MANU.Control of the loop or loop controller command can then be engaged. When the command is a digital value, it is subject to the high and low limits as well as the speed limit. Output is processed on each task cycle.

Controlling Servo output without position copy in manual mode

Manual control is always carried out on the OUT_MAN variable. This is limited be-tween 0 and 100. However, if OUT_MAN does not have a direct link with the actual position of the actuator, the actuator must be able to be opened or closed, even if OUT_MAN has reached one of its limits. To do this, it is possible to enter a value into OUT_MAN which is beyond its limits: OUT_MAN will be limited, but the change in the calculated command will be accepted by the Servo function.For example, OUT_MAN = 100.0, the actuator is open at 50%. To apply an opening of 70%, you must enter OUT_MAN = 120.0. OUT_MAN will then take on the limited value of 100.00.

Execution in automatic mode

In automatic mode, the command value is calculated by the loop controller from the setpoint value and the PV value.Switching to automatic mode is carried out from the PL7 or XBT-F screens. It can also be carried out by sending a command. When this command is taken into ac-count, automatic mode is indicated by the status bit STS_AUTO_MANU. Output is processed on each sampling cycle.

282 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Autotuning and Tracking mode

Autotuning execution

Before autotuning, you must first enter step function duration, performance and am-plitude of the desired command.If these parameters have too small or too large values, autotuning will not be exe-cuted.The loop controller can be in automatic or manual mode before autotuning is exe-cuted. Sending a command starts the autotuning process. During the autotuning process (2.5 times the step function period), the function controls the loop controller output. This output cannot be modified.The autotuning function automatically sets loop controller coefficients. The diagnos-tics word shows any possible faults detected during autotuning. When autotuning is complete, the loop controller assumes its operating mode prior to the autotuning op-eration.If the loop controller is in automatic mode, it uses the new parameters. The Previ-ous adjustment command returns you to the previous parameters.

Tracking mode execution

This operating mode is used to force a process control loop’s digital outputs. This is often used when closing an open loop to prevent a bump occurring in the command units.Tracking mode is also used in back-up architectures composed of one active and one passive PLC. Here it makes the passive PLC outputs identical to the active PLC outputs. Tracking mode uses a parameter (%MF address) and a command (send command):l Switching to Tracking mode is done by sending a command. The command is re-

fused if the address containing the Tracking value is not entered.l If the order is sent, the process control loop output value is replaced by the Track-

ing output value. The internal variables are regularly initialized with the output val-ue.

l If the order is given to abort Tracking mode, the loop controller returns to its pre-vious operating mode without output bump.

Tracking mode has higher priority than automatic, manual and autotuning modes.Tracking mode is not available for all loop controllers (characteristics none). For ex-ample, the ON OFF loop controller does not have this mode.Tracking mode is global on cascade and auto selector loops.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 283

Operating modes

Auto / Manual and Manual / Auto switching

Auto / Manual switching

The manual command is continuously updated: it tracks the command output. On Auto / Manual switching, the first manual value given is the last value calculated by the loop controller; which prevents bumps.

Manual / Auto switching

Manual / Auto switching (for any loop controller other than ON OFF) is bumpless on the output command. For the PID, two scenarios can be distinguished:l Scenario: PID with integral action (Ti <> 0):

The PID algorithm in incremental form guarantees there will be no bumps during the transition from Manual to Auto. In this case, the PID algorithm always tracks the applied actual output.

l Scenario: PID without integral action (Ti = 0):It is possible to obtain a bumpless Manual/Auto transition if the mode is config-ured as bumpless in the PID function parameters (if the PID has an integral ac-tion, this configuration has no object).The OUTBIAS manual integral parameter is calculated during the switch so that deviation between the actual output and the output calculated by the PID algo-rithm in absolute format is accepted.If bumpless mode is not selected, OUTBIAS is not recalculated on switch.

284 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Behavior of loops during I/O errors

Description By design, the process control loops do not accept possible errors that could occur on I/O cards. A loop’s operating mode can be made conditional during an I/O error, through the sequential program. Application monitoring, associated module bits and diagnostic words can generate the appropriate command for this loop.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 285

Operating modes

10.4 Operating modes for each process control loop

At a Glance


This section describes operating modes for each of the process control loops: pro-cess loop, single loop, cascade loop and auto selector loop.



Topic Page

Process loop operating modes 287

Single loop operating modes (3 single loops) 288

Cascade loop operating modes 289

Auto selector loop operating modes 291

286 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Process loop operating modes

At a Glance Depending on loop controller type, this loop can have 2, 3 or 4 different operating modes (eg. automatic, manual, autotuning, Tracking modes). Autotuning can be launched if the loop controller is in automatic or manual mode.Switching to Tracking mode has priority and will possibly cancel the autotuning in progress.

Initial operating mode

The initial operating mode of the loop can be configured on cold start. You can spec-ify:l Whether the setpoint is local or remote, as well as the initial local setpoint value.l Whether the loop controller starts in automatic or manual mode. The initial man-

ual value, if the loop controller is not an ON OFF loop controller

Process loop with a PID loop controller

The following diagram illustrates a process loop with a PID loop controller:

If the output branch sends dotted lines back to OUT_MAN, the limits have been ac-cepted.If the loop controller is Split Range or Heat/Cool type, there are 2 output branches. In this instance, autotuning and Servo type output without copy are not available.If the loop controller is an ON OFF type in 2 or 3 states, there is no Feed forward branch or output branch.

TR_I

PIDor

IMC

Auto / Manual

Tracking

OUT_MANProcess value branch

Autotuning

Setpoint branch

Feedforward branch

AT_STARTAT_STOP Output

BranchKP, TI, TD


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 287

Operating modes

Single loop operating modes (3 single loops)

At a Glance The 3 single loops are independent and are represented by a diagram equivalent to that of the process loop, with the exception of:l The Feed forward branch does not exist.l A Split Range or Heat/Cool loop controller cannot be configured.l The Process Value and Setpoint branches are simplified.

Single loop with a PID loop con-troller

The following diagram illustrates a single loop with a PID loop controller:

Only one autotuning operation can be launched at a time on the 3 loops from the process control channel. If a second autotuning operation is requested, it is refused.

TR_I

PIDor

IMC

Auto / Manual

Tracking


Autotuning

Setpoint branch


BranchKP, TI, TD


288 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Cascade loop operating modes

At a Glance All the switches are done without bumps on the loop controller outputs. Slave loop operating mode management is identical to process loop operating mode manage-ment: this loop behaves as if it were alone.However, there are mechanisms specific to the master loop:l Manual mode and Auto/Manu switching are identical to those of the process loop.l If the loop controller is in automatic mode (default mode), 2 cases must be distin-

guished:l The slave loop controller is in automatic mode and uses the remote setpoint.

In this case, the cascade is closed, so the master loop is really in automatic mode.

l The slave loop controller is in automatic mode and uses the local setpoint, au-totuning is running, loop controller is in tracking mode. In this case, the master loop controller is in tracking mode.

Closing the cascade

As the aim is to avoid a bump on cascade close, there are various situations:l If the slave loop controller uses the local setpoint, the master loop controller fol-

lows the slave’s local setpoint.l If not, if the slave loop controller has an integral action, the master loop controller

follows the slave loop process value.l Finally, if not, the slave loop controller is a P or LF. The master loop output is op-

timally calculated to prevent a bump during cascade close (according to the slave loop controller output and its parameters).

Cold start On cold start, the master loop controller always starts in automatic mode. However, the initial operating mode for the slave loop controller and setpoint type for each loop (Remote/Local) can be configured.

Freezing output change

When the master is in automatic mode and the slave output is becoming saturated, the master loop has an additional function, which freezes the master output change in the direction the slave is being saturated. This function limits saturation of the master’s integral action. It is thus only active if the master loop controller has an in-tegral action.For example, when the slave loop controller is in automatic mode, it is configured in reverse action and its output is at its maximum limit. To move the output from its limit by acting on the setpoint, the setpoint must be lowered. The master output is then slanting in a rising direction.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 289

Operating modes

Cascade loop with a PID loop controller

The following schema shows a cascade loop with a PID loop controller:

The cascade loop is globally made from 2 process loops with some restrictions and some additional functions.The OUT_MAN master loop output is the remote setpoint of the slave loop setpoint branch. OUT_MAN output is thus expressed in the slave loop scale. It is subject to the slave loop Setpoint branch level limit.The slave loop controller can be Split Range or Heat/Cool.The Auto/Manual operating mode and the value of the master loop manual com-mand cannot be accessed from the PL7 process control screens. They can however be accessed via the user program.

Restrictions Restrictions are as follows:l No totalizer on master loop process value branch. l No Feed forward branch on slave loop.l No ON OFF loop controller on any of the loops.l The slave loop Setpoint branch is a single branch, with no scaling.l Only one model loop controller can be configured on the master or slave loop.

PID / IMCMaster

Auto / Manual


Autotuning

Setpoint branch

Feedforward branch

AT_STARTAT_STOPKP, TI, TD

TR_I

PID / IMCSlave

Auto / Manual

Tracking

OUT_MAN

Setpoint branch

Autotuning



BranchKP, TI, TD



SP

290 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Auto selector loop operating modes

At a Glance This loop causes 2 loop controllers to work on the same output. Each loop controller produces an action and a (minimum or maximum) comparator selects the action to be applied. The auto selector loop consists of a main loop made from a process loop and a secondary loop made from a single loop. The two loops share one single out-put branch.For example, the auto selector loop is used to implement a restricted process con-trol. The main loop is used to monitor the main value and the secondary loop is used to prevent an auxiliary value from exceeding a limit (or restriction), specified by this loop’s setpoint.

Inhibiting one of the loops

One of the following commands can be used to inhibit a loop to have either a process loop, or a single loop: direct output 1 or direct output 2.The 2 loop controllers have the same sampling period.

Auto selector loop configuration

An auto selector loop can be configured in 2 ways:l Case 1: one single Auto/Manual at output branch level after selector. The

OUT_MAN manual command value is thus directly applied on the loop output.l Case 2: an Auto/Manual on the output of each loop controller. Each loop control-

ler’s operating mode is then independent. Each loop controller’s output value can be manually set upstream of the selector.

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 291

Operating modes

Case 1: one single Auto/Man-ual at output branch level

The following schema shows an auto selector loop with only one Auto/Manual at out-put branch level:

In this case, the 2 loop controllers are always in automatic mode and track the ap-plied OUT_MAN command. When the loop is in automatic mode, the output of these loop controllers is accepted. If this is not the case, the output is not accepted. As the loop controllers are trackers of the actual output, there is no risk of bump on switching if the loop controller’s integral action is used.The initial loop operating mode and initial setpoint type (Remote/Local) for each loop controller can be configured.

TR_I

PID orIMCMain

Auto / Manual

Tracking

OUT_MAN


Autotuning

Setpoint branch

Feedforward branch


Branch

KP, TI, TD

PID orIMC

secondary


Autotuning

Setpoint branch

KP, TI, TD

AS

DIR2

DIR1


292 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

Operating modes

Case 2: An Auto/Manual on the output of each loop controller

The following schema shows an auto selector loop with one Auto/Manual on each loop controller’s output:

In this case, in manual mode, you do not act directly on the actuator command, but at the level of each loop controller’s output (OUT_MAN1 and OUT_MAN2).As long as at least one loop controller is in automatic mode, output selection is made during the loop sampling period. If both loop controllers are in manual mode, selec-tion is made on each task cycle.Both loop controllers permanently track the OUT_MAN actual output. In automatic mode, if they are using an integral action, they take the previous OUT_MAN output value into account. This signifies that on Manual/Auto switching, the loop controller will not use its last manual value, but the last OUT_MAN actual output value.The initial operating mode and initial setpoint type (Remote/Local) for each loop con-troller can be configured.

PIDor

IMC

Auto / Manual

OUT_MAN1Process value branch

Autotuning

Setpoint branch

Feedforward branch

KP, TI, TD

TR_I

PIDor

IMC

Auto / Manual

Tracking

OUT_MAN


Autotuning

Setpoint branch


Branch

KP, TI, TD

OUT_MAN2

AS

DIR2

DIR1



TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 293

Operating modes

Starting autotuning forces the auto selector to the direct position of the autotuned loop. At the end of autotuning, the auto selector must be reset to the required posi-tion, if it is different from the one imposed.

294 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

11
Process control language objects
At a Glance


This Chapter describes the various language objects associated with inputs/outputs and process control channel parameters.



Section Topic Page

11.1 Language objects associated with the process control chan-nels

297

11.2 Language objects associated with the process loop 306

11.3 Language objects associated with the 3 single loops 320

11.4 Language objects associated with the single loop cascade 339

11.5 Language objects associated with the self-selective loop 358

11.6 Language objects associated with the setpoint programmer 378

295


296 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


11.1 Language objects associated with the process control channels

At a Glance


This section describes the language objects associated with the process control channels.



Topic Page

Introduction 298

Double word "Order of Command" 300

Control loops command word 302

Setpoint programmer command word (%MWxy.i.7) 304

Summary of selection and command words 305

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 297


Introduction

At a Glance All the variables associated with a process control channel (for example: Kp, T_FILT, ...) are in default read and/or write.

The language object %CH is used to simplify explicit reads and writes. It is used to:l Read module and channel status words.l Write parameters.l Save parameters.l Send commands.

Sending commands

Explicit instructions are applied to the language object of the %MWxy.i.j channel.

Example 1: sending an autotune order to the first loop of a 3 single loops loop con-troller. This word contains the explicit command acting on the control loop.

There is no limit to the number of commands on a PLC cycle. The recognition of the instruction and the updating of the states of the process control channel concerned come into effect on the next cycle of the task.

Note: Orders associated with the operating mode of the loop controller (Auto, Manu, Tracking, Autotuning) cannot be sent at the same time in the same cycle (only the last instruction carried out in the cycle is recognized). In contrast, comple-mentary orders (of the types Remote, freeze Totalizer function , etc.) can be sent in the same cycle.

%Mwxy.i.13:=16#000E

%MWxy.i.14:=1

WRITE_CMD %CH0x.i

(*autotuning command*)

(*on 1st loop*)

(*send command *)%M100

298 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Example 2: sending Manu mode to the slave loop of a cascade type channel.

Values Command parameter or selection word (%MDxy.i.j) values

l Setpoint programmer%MDxy.i.8 = j profile j j ={1, ..., 6}

l Cascade loop%MDxy.i.12 = 1 master loop%MDxy.i.12 = 2 slave loop

l Auto selector loop%MDxy.i.12 = 1 main loop%MDxy.i.12 = 2 secondary loop%MDxy.i.12 = 4 global loop

As the process loop has only one loop, the %MDxy.i.12 command parameter has no significance.

l 3 single loops loop controller%MDxy.i.14 = j profile j j ={1, 2, 3}

! (*slave loop selection*) %MDxy.i.12: =2;! (*switching to manual mode*) %MDxy.i.11: =16#0023;! (*send command*) IF %M100 THEN WRITE_CMD %CHx.i; END_IF;

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 299


Double word "Order of Command"

At a Glance The double word order of command, defined in the configuration of each loop, en-ables one or more operating mode change commands to be sent.

The required double word %MD is entered with loop parameters of the configura-tion screen.

The first sixteen bits of X0 to X15 are the same as those of the status word of the periodic data table. This single word is copied into the fist part of the double word order of command.

Description This table describes each bit of the order of command double word.

Note: if the option Reset %MWi on cold restart is checked on the processor con-figuration screen, the X28 bit of the order of command double word will be reset to zero during the first cycle following cold restart. It is therefore mandatory that the X28 bit is set to 1 by the application in the processing section of the cold restart (application operating mode management).

Double word bit

Associated simple word bit

Description Indication Command (1)

%MDi:X0 %MWi:X0 0 : Manu, 1 : Auto X X

%MDi:X1 %MWi:X1 Tracking X X

%MDi:X2 %MWi:X2 Autotuning X X

%MDi:X3 %MWi:X3 0 : Remote, 1 : Local X X

%MDi:X4 %MWi:X4 Output 1 of ON OFF or of SERVO X X (2)

%MDi:X5 %MWi:X5 Output 2 of ON OFF3 or of SERVO X X(2)

%MDi:X6 %MWi:X6 Output 1 of SERVO2 X -

%MDi:X7 %MWi:X7 Output 2 of SERVO2 X -

%MDi:X8 %MWi:X8 SP1 or SP2 selection X X

%MDi:X9 %MWi:X9 Auto-selector in auto-selection mode X X

%MDi:X10 %MWi:X10 Auto-selector in direct main loop mode X X

%MDi:X11 %MWi:X11 Auto-selector in direct secondary loop mode X X

%MDi:X12 %MWi:X12 PID1 or PID2 output selected X

%MDi:X13 %MWi:X13 Reserved - -


300 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



%MDi:X16 %MWi+1:X0 0 : copy not used,1 : copy used

X X

%MDi:X17 %MWi+1:X1 0 : unfreezing of the totalization, 1: freezing of the totalization

X X

%MDi:X18 %MWi+1:X2 Re-initialization of the totalization - X(3)

%MDi:X19 %MWi+1:X3 Return to previous adjustments - X(3)

%MDi:X20 %MWi+1:X4 Autotuning diagnostics acknowledgement - X(3)

%MDi:X21 %MWi+1:X5 SERVO1 re-initialization - X(3)

%MDi:X22 %MWi+1:X6 SERVO2 re-initialization - X(3)

%MDi:X23 %MWi+1:X7 Save parameters - X(3)

%MDi:X24 %MWi+1:X8 Reserved - -




%MDi:X28 %MWi+1:X12 0 : Writing of command word prohibited,1 : writing of command word authorized

X X




Key

X : Yes- : No(1) : the command is only acknowledged if the X28 bit is at 1(2) : for the function, there is no associated command, it is simply for information(3) : the bit is automatically rest to zero

Double word bit

Associated simple word bit

Description Indication Command (1)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 301


Control loops command word

Value of the command word

%MWxy.i.11 is the command word for process, cascade and auto selector loops. %MWxy.i.13 is the command word for the 3 single loops loop controller.

Value Meaning

16#0001 Switches to Simulation or Non-simulation mode for the process value input

16#0002 Switches to Remote or Local mode

16#0003 Switches to Manual or Automatic mode

16#0004 Freezes Totalizer function

16#0005 Unfreezes Totalizer function

16#0006 Resets Totalizer function

16#0007 Selects Remote1 setpoint

16#0008 Selects Remote2 setpoint

16#0009 Not used

16#000A Not used

16#000B Switches to Simulation or Non-simulation for Feed Forward input

16#000C Switches to Tracking mode

16#000D Switches to Non-tracking mode

16#000E Starts autotuning

16#000F Stops autotuning

16#0010 Returns to previous adjustments

16#0011 Uses copy (Cannot be used after a Split Range or Heat/Cool PID)

16#0012 Does not use copy (Cannot be used after a Split Range or Heat/Cool PID)

16#0013 Acknowledges autotuning diagnostics

16#0014 Activates RAISE

16#0015 Deactivates RAISE

16#0016 Activates LOWER

16#0017 Deactivates LOWER

16#0018 Not used

16#0019 Resets Servo1

16#0020 Resets Servo2

16#0021 Selects the setpoint in Local mode

16#0022 Selects the setpoint in Remote mode

16#0023 Switches to Manu

16#0024 Switches to Auto

302 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


16#0025 Position of selector in auto selector

16#0026 Position of selector in the main loop

16#0027 Position of selector in the secondary loop

Value Meaning

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 303


Setpoint programmer command word (%MWxy.i.7)

Value of the command word

%MWxy.i.7 is the setpoint programmer command word.

Value Meaning

16#0001 Resets the setpoint programmer (action on the current profile)

16#0002 Triggers the selected profile

16#0003 Stops the selected profile

16#0004 Freezes evolution of the profil

16#0005 Unfreezes current profile

16#0006 Jumps to the following segment

16#0007 Jumps to the previous segment

16#0008 Inhibits the guaranteed dwell time function

16#0009 Activates the guaranteed dwell time function

16#000A Freezes / Unfreezes profile evolution

16#000B Freezes / Unfreezes the guaranteed dwell time function

304 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Summary of selection and command words

Type of channel: This table reiterates the selection and command words for each type of loop.

Type of loop Command word Command parameter or Selection word

Process Loop %MWxy.i.11 None

Cascade Loop %MWxy.i.11 %MDxy.i.12 = j(j = 1: master, 2: slave)

Auto Selector Loop %MWxy.i.11 %MDxy.i.12 = j(j = 1: main, 2: secondary, 4: global loop)

3 single loops %MWxy.i.13 %MDxy.i.14 = j(j = 1,2 or 3 according to loop number)

Setpoint programmer %MWxy.i.7 %MDxy.i.8 = j(j = 1, 2, ... 6 according to profile num-ber)

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 305


11.2 Language objects associated with the process loop

At a Glance


This section describes the different language objects associated with the process loop.



Topic Page

Configuration language objects 307

Error and diagnostics language objects 311

Process control language objects 316

306 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Configuration language objects

Description This table describes all the language objects associated with the process loop.

Address Parameter name Default value Comment

%KWxy.i.0 CONFIG_0 No Object Word grouping together the different Process Value con-figuration bits

%KWxy.i.0:X0 FILTRAGE Missing (0) Filtering function of the pro-cess value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X1 GENERATEUR DE FONCTION

Missing (0) Function generator of the pro-cess value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X2 TOTALISATEUR Missing (0) Totalizer function of the pro-cess value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X3 RACINE CARREE Missing (0) Square root function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X4 ALARMES Present Alarm function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X8 PV_CLIP Missing (0) Clipping or non-clipping of the process value

%KWxy.i.0:X9 EXTRAPOL No (0) Extrapolation of function gen-erator

%KWxy.i.0:X10 PV_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0) Type of process value: unipo-lar/bipolar

%KWxy.i.0:X11 PV_EXTERN Missing (0) Choice of Standard process value (0) / External process value (1)

%KWxy.i.0:X13 TOTALISATEUR 1 (X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms(X13=1, X14 =0): phys/ms

%KWxy.i.0:X14 TOTALISATEUR 0 (X13=0, X14 =1): phys/ms(X13=1, X14 =1): phys/ms

%KWxy.i.1 SANS Objet No Objet Word grouping together the different setpoint configura-tion bits

%KWxy.i.1:X0 SP_SIMPLE Selected (1) Type of setpoint selected: sin-gle

%KWxy.i.1:X1 SP_SELECTION Not selected (0) Type of setpoint: selection

%KWxy.i.1:X2 SPEED_LIMITEUR Not selected (0) Speed limiter on the setpoint

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 307


%KWxy.i.1:X3 SP_SPP not selected (0) Type of setpoint selected: pro-grammer

%KWxy.i.1:X4 RL/L Remote local (0) Speed limiter either on the lo-cal setpoint or on Remote/Lo-cal

%KWxy.i.1:X8 SEL_MIN Missing (0) Function selected if there is a selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X9 SEL_MAX Missing (0) Function selected if there is a selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X10 SEL_SWITCH Present on selec-tion

Function selected if there is a selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X11 R/L_INIT Local (1) Initial value of the Remote/Lo-cal selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X12 R1/R2_INIT R1 (0) Initial value of the status of the selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X13 SP_RATIO Not selected (0) Type of setpoint selected: ra-tio

%KWxy.i.1:X14 SP_LIMITEUR Not present Setpoint limiter (e.g.: PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.1:X15 SP_FOLW Non tracking set-point (0)

Tracking setpoint

%KWxy.i.2 CONFIG_2 No Object Word grouping together the different loop controller and FF configuration bits

%KWxy.i.2:X0 PID Present PID function of the loop con-troller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X1 ONOFF2 Missing (0) 2 state ON OFF loop control-ler branch

%KWxy.i.2:X2 ONOFF3 Missing (0) 3 state ON OFF loop control-ler branch

%KWxy.i.2:X3 SPLRG/CHFROID No Object OR for presence bits Heat/Cool and Split Range

%KWxy.i.2:X4 SPLIT RANGE Missing (0) Loop controller branch Split Range function

%KWxy.i.2:X5 CHAUD/FROID Not selected Heat/Cool function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X6 ALARMES_DEV Present Alarm on deviation function of the loop controller branch


308 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%KWxy.i.2:X7 FEED FORWARD Missing (0) Presence of a Feed forward input

%KWxy.i.2:X8 BUMP With bumps (1) Management of bumps when changing operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X9 PV_DEV On process value (0)

Type of derived action

%KWxy.i.2:X10 MIX_PAR PID parallel se-ries

Type of loop controller mixed or parallel

%KWxy.i.2:X11 REV_DIR PID backward ac-tion (0)

Type of loop controller action

%KWxy.i.2:X12 MANU/AUTO_INIT Manu (0) Initial value of loop controller operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X13 LEAD LAG Missing (0) Leadlag function of the Feed forward branch

%KWxy.i.2:X14 FF_UNI_BIP unipolar Type of Feed forward process value: unipolar / bipolar

%KWxy.i.2:X15 IMC Missing (0) IMC function of the loop con-troller branch

%KWxy.i.3 CONFIG_3 No Object Word grouping together the different output configuration bits

%KWxy.i.3:X0 SERVO Selected Type of output selected: Ser-vo

%KWxy.i.3:X1 SERVO2 Selected Type of output selected: Ser-vo

%KWxy.i.3:X2 ANALOGIQUE1 Selected Type of output selected: Ana-log


%KWxy.i.3:X4 PWM1 Selected Type of output selected: PWM

%KWxy.i.3:X5 PWM2 Selected Type of output selected: PWM

%KWxy.i.3:X8 POT_REV1 Direct (0) Servo copy direction


%KWxy.i.3:X10 POT_VAL1_INIT No (0) Presence of Servo copy

%KWxy.i.3:X11 POT_VAL2_INIT Yes (1) Presence of (Reserved) Servo copy

%KWxy.i.3:X12 ANALOG1_UNI_BIP Unipolar Type of analog output: unipo-lar / bipolar


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 309


%KWxy.i.3:X13 ANALOG2_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0) Type of analog output: unipo-lar / bipolar

%KWxy.i.4 NOM DE LA BOU-CLE

Loop i with i [0;9] Loop name

%KWxy.i.8 UNITE DE LA BOU-CLE

Loop unit


310 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Error and diagnostics language objects

Description This table describes the error and diagnostics language objects associated with the process loop.

Address Parameter name Default value

Comment

%MWxy.i.0 EXCH_STS Exchange management sta-tus

%MWxy.i.1 EXCH_ERR Exchange report status

%MWxy.i.2 CH_FLT Channel standard fault

%MWxy.i.2:X4 INTERNAL_FLT Serious internal error

%MWxy.i.2:X5 CONF_FLT Configuration error

%MWxy.i.2:X6 MISSING_ADDR Address of IMC register missing

%MWxy.i.2:X7 WARN Sum of errors

%MWxy.i.2:X8 STS_ERR_CALC_CORR Loop controller branch calcu-lation error

%MWxy.i.2:X9 STS_ERR_FLOT_CORR Loop controller branch float-ing point error

%MWxy.i.2:X10 STS_ERR_CALC_PV PV branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X11 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV PV branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X12 STS_ERR_CALC_OUT OUT branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X13 STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT OUT branch floating point er-ror

%MWxy.i.3 CH_STATUS2

%MWxy.i.3:X0 STS_ERR_SCALE_PV PV branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3:X1 STS_ERR_TH_SPLRG Split Range function thresh-olds incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X2 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1 OUT1 branch scale incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X3 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT2 OUT2 branch scale incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X4 STS_ERR_COPY_POS Servo copy address missing

%MWxy.i.4 STATUS1 Word grouping together the different Process Value/Set-point status bits

%MWxy.i.4:X0 STS_HOLD_TOT Freezes Totalizer function

%MWxy.i.4:X1 STS_PV_SIM Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.4:X2 STS_PV_H_LIM Process value high limit

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 311


%MWxy.i.4:X3 STS_PV_L_LIM Process value low limit

%MWxy.i.4:X4 STS_SP_H_LIM Setpoint high limit

%MWxy.i.4:X5 STS_SP_L_LIM Setpoint low limit

%MWxy.i.4:X6 STS_L_R R/L Init Remote Setpoint (0) Local Setpoint (1)

%MWxy.i.4:X7 STS_R1_R2 Remote2 Setpoint (1) Remote1 Setpoint (0)

%MWxy.i.4:X8 STS_ALARMS OR logic of process value alarms

%MWxy.i.4:X9 STS_HH Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X10 STS_H High alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X11 STS_L Low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X12 STS_LL Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X13 STS_DEVH High alarm for Process Val-ue/Setpoint deviation (>0)

%MWxy.i.4:X14 STS_DEVL Low alarm for Process Val-ue/Setpoint deviation (<0)

%MWxy.i.4:X15 STS_THLD_DONE Totalizer threshold reached

%MWxy.i.5 STATUS2 No Object Word grouping together the different Loop controller/Feed forward status bits

%MWxy.i.5:X0 STS_AT_RUNNING Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.5:X1 STS_TR_S Tracking in progress

%MWxy.i.5:X2

%MWxy.i.5:X3 STS_M_A Status of PID Operating mode

%MWxy.i.5:X4 STS_RAISE1 Open command

%MWxy.i.5:X5 STS_LOWER1 Close command

%MWxy.i.5:X6 STS_RAISE2 Branch output 2 open com-mand

%MWxy.i.5:X7 STS_LOWER2 Branch output 2 close com-mand

%MWxy.i.5:X8 STS_OUT_L_LIM

%MWxy.i.5:X9 STS_OUT_H_LIM

%MWxy.i.5:X10 STS_TOP_NEXT_CYCLE Sampling pulse on next cycle


Comment

312 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.5:X11 STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE Sampling pulse in current cy-cle

%MWxy.i.5:X12 STS_FF_SIM Status of simulation of the FF process value

%MWxy.i.6 STATUS3 No Object Word grouping together the different Servo status bits

%MWxy.i.6:X0 POT_VAL1 Servo operation with copy position

%MWxy.i.6:X1 POT_VAL2 Servo operation with copy position (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X2 RAISE STOP1 Servo drive open stop reached (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X3 LOWER STOP1 Servo drive close stop reached (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X4 RAISE STOP2 Servo drive open stop reached (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X5 LOWER STOP2 Servo drive close stop reached (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.7 STATUS4 No Object Word grouping together the fine diagnostics of different errors (process value, set-point, FF)

%MWxy.i.7:X0 SP_MIN_WARN SP_MIN and SP_MAX pa-rameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X1 XI_WARN Xi parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X2 Yi_WARN Yi parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X6 OVER_TOT_WARN Totalizer overflow error

%MWxy.i.7:X8 INP_INFR1_WARN INP_INFR1 and INP_SUPR1 parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X9 INP_INFR2_WARN INP_INFR2 and INP_SUPR2 parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X10 RATIO_WARN RATIO_MIN and RATIO_MAX parameters check error

%MWxy.i.7:X11 SP_CALC_WARN Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.7:X12 SP_FLOAT_WARN Setpoint floating point error


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 313


%MWxy.i.7:X13 FF_CALC_WARN Feed forward calculation er-ror

%MWxy.i.7:X14 FF_FLOAT_WARN Feed forward floating point error

%MWxy.i.8 STATUS5 No Object Word grouping together au-totuning diagnostics

%MWxy.i.8:X0 AT_FAILED Autotuning failed

%MWxy.i.8:X1 AT_ABORTED Autotuning diagnostics inter-rupted

%MWxy.i.8:X2 AT_ERR_PARAM Autotuning Diagnostics pa-rameter error

%MWxy.i.8:X3 AT_PWF_OR_EFB_FAILURE Autotuning Diagnostics sys-tem error or power outage

%MWxy.i.8:X4 AT_ERR_SATUR Autotuning Diagnostics satu-ration of process value

%MWxy.i.8:X5 AT_DV_TOO_SMALL Autotuning Diagnostics in-sufficient process value devi-ation

%MWxy.i.8:X6 AT_TSAMP_HIGH Autotuning Diagnostics sam-pling period too long

%MWxy.i.8:X7 AT_INCONSIST_RESP Autotuning Diagnostics in-consistent response

%MWxy.i.8:X8 AT_NOT_STAB_INIT Autotuning Diagnostics pro-cess value unstable initially

%MWxy.i.8:X9 AT_TMAX_TOO_SMALL Autotuning Diagnostics step function duration too short

%MWxy.i.8:X10 AT_NOISE_TOO_HIGH Autotuning Diagnostics pro-cess value noise too high

%MWxy.i.8:X11 AT_TMAX_TOO_HIGH Autotuning Diagnostics step function duration too long

%MWxy.i.8:X12 AT_OVERSHOOT Autotuning Diagnostics over-shoot above 10%

%MWxy.i.8:X13 AT_UNDERSHOOT Autotuning Diagnostics non-minimum phase too large

%MWxy.i.8:X14 AT_UNSYMETRICAL_PT Autotuning Diagnostics pro-cess too non-symmetrical

%MWxy.i.8:X15 AT_INTEGRATING_PT Autotuning Diagnostics inte-grating process


Comment

314 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.9 Reserved

%MWxy.i.10 Reserved

%MWxy.i.11 ORDER_COMMAND Command order

%MDxy.i.12 PARAM_COMMAND Command parameter


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 315



Description This table describes the process control language objects associated with the pro-cess loop.


Comment

%MWxy.i.14 PV_SIM No Object Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.15 FF_SIM No Object Simulated Feed forward input

%MFxy.i.16 T_ECH 0,3 Sampling period

%MFxy.i.18 OUT1 No Object Value of output 1 for Heat/Cool or Split Range

%MFxy.i.20 OUT2 No Object Value of output 2 for Heat/Cool or Split Range

%MFxy.i.22 OUTD No Object Value of command variation

%MFxy.i.24 OUTFF No Object Value of Feed forward action on physical scale

%MFxy.i.26 OUT_MAN No Object Command value

%MFxy.i.28 DEV No Object Process value setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.30 PV No Object Value of process value on physical scale

%MFxy.i.32 SP No Object Value of setpoint on physical scale

%MFxy.i.34 PV_INF 0.0 Process value low limit

%MFxy.i.36 PV_SUP 100.0 Process value high limit

%MFxy.i.38 KP 1.0 Proportional co-efficient

%MFxy.i.40 TI 0.0 Integral time

%MFxy.i.42 TD 0.0 Derivative time

%MFxy.i.44 OUTBIAS 0.0 Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.46 INT_BAND 0.0 Integral band

%MFxy.i.48 DBAND 0.0 Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.50 KD 10.0 Filtering of the derivative

%MFxy.i.52 OUTRATE 0.0 Limit of output 1 speed variation

%MFxy.i.54 OUTRATE2 0.0 Limit of output 2 speed variation

%MFxy.i.56 OUT1_INF 0.0 Output 1 low limit

%MFxy.i.58 OUT1_SUP 100.0 Output 1 high limit

%MFxy.i.60 SP_MIN 0.0 Setpoint low limit

%MFxy.i.62 SP_MAX 100. Setpoint high limit

%MFxy.i.64 OUT2_INF 0.0 Output 2 low limit

316 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MFxy.i.66 OUT2_SUP 100.0 Output 2 high limit

%MFxy.i.68 OUT1_TH1 0.0 Threshold 1 for output 1 for Heat/Cool or Split Range




%MFxy.i.76 PV_LL 5.0 Process value very low threshold

%MFxy.i.78 PV_L 5.0 Process value low threshold

%MFxy.i.80 PV_H 95.0 Process value high threshold

%MFxy.i.82 PV_HH 95.0 Process value very high threshold

%MFxy.i.84 RATIO 1.0 Ratio value

%MFxy.i.86 RATIO_MIN 0.0 Ration minimum value

%MFxy.i.88 RATIO_MAX 100.0 Ratio maximum value

%MFxy.i.90 RATIO_BIAS 0.0 Value of Ratio bias

%MFxy.i.92 ONOFF_L 5.0 ON OFF loop controller low threshold

%MFxy.i.94 ONOFF_H 5.0 ON OFF loop controller high threshold

%MFxy.i.96 HYST 0.0 Hysteresis of 3 state ON OFF loop con-troller

%MFxy.i.98 DEV_L 5.0 Deviation low threshold

%MFxy.i.100 DEV_H 5.0 Deviation high threshold

%MFxy.i.102 T_FILTER 0.0 Process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.104 K_FILTER 1.0 Multiplication co-efficient on process val-ue filtering

%MFxy.i.106 FILT_OUT No Object Value of filtering output

%MFxy.i.108 SQRT_OUT No Object Value of square root output

%MFxy.i.110 E2_IN 1428.0 Abcissae of first point of Segment S2






%MFxy.i.122 E2_OUT 14.28 Coordinates of first point of Segment S2


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 317







%MFxy.i.134 THLD 1E+8 Totalizer limit

%MFxy.i.136 R_RATE 0.0 Setpoint rise speed limit

%MFxy.i.138 D_RATE 0.0 Setpoint descent speed limit

%MFxy.i.140 SPEED_LIM_OUT No Object Value of setpoint speed limiter output

%MFxy.i.142 INP_INFR1 0.0 R1 setpoint low scale

%MFxy.i.144 INP_SUPR1 100.0 R1 setpoint high scale

%MFxy.i.146 INP_INFR2 0.0 R2 setpoint low scale

%MFxy.i.148 INP_SUPR2 100.0 R2 setpoint high scale

%MFxy.i.150 T1_FF 0.0 Feed forward process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.152 T2_FF 0.0 Feed forward process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.154 OUT_FF_INF 0.0 Feed forward action low limit

%MFxy.i.156 OUT_FF_SUP 100.0 Feed forward action high limit

%MFxy.i.158 T_MOTOR1 10.0 Opening time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.160 T_MINI1 0.0 Minimum opening time for valve con-trolled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.162 T_MOTOR2 10.0 Opening time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.164 T_MINI2 0.0 Minimum opening time for valve con-trolled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.166 AT_STEP 10.0 Autotuning step function amplitude

%MFxy.i.168 AT_TMAX 100.0 Autotuning step function duration

%MFxy.i.170 AT_PERF 0.5 Autotuning stability criterion

%MFxy.i.172 KP_PREV No Object Value before proportional co-efficient au-totuning

%MFxy.i.174 TI_PREV No Object Value before integral co-efficient auto-tuning

%MFxy.i.176 TD_PREV No Object Value before derived co-efficient auto-tuning

%MFxy.i.178 KS 1.0 IMC static gain


Comment

318 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MFxy.i.180 OL_TIME 1.0 Time constant in BO

%MFxy.i.182 T_DELAY 0.0 Current pure delay time

%MFxy.i.184 CL_PERF 1.0 Time ratio OL / CL

%MFxy.i.186 Reserved





Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 319


11.3 Language objects associated with the 3 single loops

At a Glance


This sub-section describes the language objects of the 3 single loops.



Topic Page


Default and diagnostics language objects 325


320 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



Description This table describes the process control language objects associated with the 3 sin-gle loops.


%KWxy.i.0 CONFIG_0_B1 No Object Word bringing together the dif-ferent configuration bits of the process value

%KWxy.i.0:X0 FILTRAGE Not configurable (0)

Filtering function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X1 GENERATEUR DE FONCTION

Not configurable (0)

Function generator of the pro-cess value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X2 TOTALISATEUR Missing (0) Totalizer function of the pro-cess value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X3 RACINE CARRÉE Square Root Root function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X4 ALARMES Present Alarm function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X8 PV_CLIP Missing (0) Clipping or non-clipping of the process value

%KWxy.i.0:X9 EXTRAPOL Not config-urable(0)

Extrapolation of function gen-erator

%KWxy.i.0:X10 PV_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0) Type of process value: unipo-lar/bipolar

%KWxy.i.0:X11 PV_EXTERN Missing (0) Choice of Standard process value (0) / External process value (1)

%KWxy.i.0:X12 VALID_C1 Enabled (1) Loop used (1) / not used (0)

%KWxy.i.0:X13 TOTALISATEUR: UNITE MESURE

1 (X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms(X13=1, X14 =0): phys/s

%KWxy.i.0:X14 TOTALISATEUR: UNITE MESURE

0 (X13=0, X14 =1): phys/mn(X13=1, X14 =1): phys/ms

%KWxy.i.1 CONFIG_1_B1 No Object Word grouping the different setpoint configuration bits

%KWxy.i.1:X0 SP_SIMPLE Selected (1) Type of setpoint selected: sin-gle

%KWxy.i.1:X1 SP_SELECTION Not configurable (0)

Type of setpoint selected: se-lection

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 321


%KWxy.i.1:X2 SPEED_LIMITEUR Not selected (0) Speed limiter on the setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X3 SP_SPP Not selected (0) Type of setpoint selected: Pro-grammer

%KWxy.i.1:X4 RL/L Remote local (0) Speed limiter either on the lo-cal setpoint or on Remote/Lo-cal

%KWxy.i.1:X8 SEL_MIN Not configurable (0)


%KWxy.i.1:X9 SEL_MAX Not configurable (0)


%KWxy.i.1:X10 SEL_SWITCH Not configurable (0)


%KWxy.i.1:X11 R/L_INIT Local (1) Initial value of the Remote/Lo-cal selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X12 R1/R2_INIT Not configurable Initial value of the status of the selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X13 SP_RATIO Not configurable (0)

Type of setpoint selected: Ra-tio

%KWxy.i.1:X14 SP_LIMITEUR not selected (0) Setpoint limiter (e.g. PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.1:X15 SP_FOLW No tracking Tracking (0)

%KWxy.i.2 CONFIG_2_B1 No Object Word bringing together the dif-ferent configuration bits of the loop controller and FF

%KWxy.i.2:X0 PID Present PID function of the loop con-troller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X1 ONOFF2 Missing (0) ON OFF 2 states branch of loop controller

%KWxy.i.2:X2 ONOFF3 Missing (0) ON OFF 3 states branch of loop controller

%KWxy.i.2:X3 SPLRG/CHFROID Not configurable (0)

OR Heat/Cool and Split Range presence bits

%KWxy.i.2:X4 SPLIT/RANGE Not configurable (0)

Loop controller branch Split Range function

%KWxy.i.2:X5 CHAUD/FROID Not configurable (0)

Loop controller branch Heat/Cool function

%KWxy.i.2:X6 ALARMES_DEV Present Alarm function on deviation of the loop controller branch


322 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%KWxy.i.2:X7 FEED FORWARD Not configurable (0)

Presence of a Feed forward in-put


%KWxy.i.2:X9 PV_DEV On process val-ue (0)

Type of derivative action


Mixed or parallel loop controller type

%KWxy.i.2:X11 REV_DIR PID reverse ac-tion (0)


%KWxy.i.2:X12 MANU/AUTO_INIT Manu (0) Initial value of loop controller operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X13 LEAD LAG Not configurable (0)

Leadlag function of the Feed forward branch

%KWxy.i.2:X14 FF_UNI_BIP Not configurable (0)

Type of Feed forward process value: unipolar/bipolar

%KWxy.i.2:X15 IMC Missing (0) IMC function of the loop con-troller branch

%KWxy.i.3 CONFIG_3_B1 No Object Word grouping together the dif-ferent output configuration bits

%KWxy.i.3:X0 SERVO Not selected Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.3:X1 SERVO2 Not configurable (0)

Type of output selected: Servo


%KWxy.i.3:X3 ANALOGIQUE2 Not configurable (0)

Type of output selected: Ana-log

%KWxy.i.3:X4 PWM1 Not selected Type of output selected: PWM

%KWxy.i.3:X5 PWM2 Not configurable (0)

Type of output selected: PWM


%KWxy.i.3:X9 POT_REV2 Not configurable (0)

Servo copy direction


%KWxy.i.3:X11 POT_VAL2_INIT Not configurable (0)

Presence of (Reserved) Servo copy

%KWxy.i.3:X12 ANALOG1_UNI_BIP Unipolar Type of analog output: unipo-lar/bipolar


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 323


%KWxy.i.3:X13 ANALOG2_UNI_BIP Not configurable (0)

Type of analog output: unipo-lar/bipolar

%KWxy.i.4 NOM DE LA BOU-CLE


%KWxy.i.8 UNITE DE LA BOU-CLE

Loop unit

%KWxy.i.11 IDEM BOUCLE 1 %KW0

Loop 2 process value. Unused functions have their bit at 0


Loop 2 setpoint


Loop 2 loop controller and FF


Loop 2 output




Loop unit


Loop 3 process value. Unused functions have their bit at 0


Loop 3 setpoint


Loop 3 loop controller and FF


Loop 3 output




Loop unit


324 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


Default and diagnostics language objects

Description This table describes the diagnostics and default language objects associated with the 3 single loops.


Comment

%MWxy.i.0 EXCH_STS Exchange management status


%MWxy.i.2 INTERNAL_FLT_B1 Standard channel fault on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X4 CONF_FLT_B1 Serious internal fault on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X5 MISSING_ADDR_B1 Configuration fault on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X6 WARN IMC register address missing on loop 1 or Servo copy address missing

%MWxy.i.2:X7 STS_ERR_CALC_COR_B1 Sum of errors

%MWxy.i.2:X8 STS_ERR_FLOT_COR_B1 Loop controller branch calculation error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X9 STS_ERR_CALC_PV_B1 Loop controller branch floating point error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X10 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_B1 PV branch calculation er-ror on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X11 STS_ERR_CALC_OUT_B1 PV branch floating point error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X12 STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT_B1 OUT branch calculation error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X13 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1_B1 OUT branch floating point error on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X14 STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_B1 OUT1 branch incorrect scale on loop 1

%MWxy.i.2:X15 CH_FLT_B2 PV branch incorrect scale on loop 1

%MWxy.i.3 INTERNAL_FLT_B2 No Object Standard channel fault on loop 2

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 325


%MWxy.i.3:X4 CONF_FLT_B2 Serious internal fault on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X5 MISSING_ADDR_B2 Configuration fault on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X6 Exchange in progress IMC register address missing on loop 2 or Servo copy address missing

%MWxy.i.3:X8 STS_ERR_CALC_COR_B2 Loop controller branch calculation error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X9 STS_ERR_FLOT_COR_B2 Loop controller branch floating point error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X10 STS_ERR_CALC_PV_B2 PV branch calculation er-ror on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X11 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_B2 PV branch floating point error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X12 STS_ERR_CALC_OUT_B2 OUT branch calculation error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X13 STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT_B2 OUT branch floating point error on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X14 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1_B2 OUT1 branch incorrect scale on loop 2

%MWxy.i.3:X15 STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_B2 PV branch incorrect scale on loop 2

%MWxy.i.4 CH_FLT_B3 Standard channel fault on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X4 INTERNAL_FLT_B3 Serious internal fault on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X5 CONF_FLT_B3 Configuration fault on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X8 STS_ERR_CALC_COR_B3 Loop controller branch calculation error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X9 STS_ERR_FLOT_COR_B3 Loop controller branch floating point error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X10 STS_ERR_CALC_PV_B3 PV branch calculation er-ror on loop 3


Comment

326 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.4:X11 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_B3 PV branch floating point error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X12 STS_ERR_CALC_OUT_B3 OUT branch calculation error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X13 STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT_B3 OUT branch floating point error on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X14 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1_B3 OUT1 branch incorrect scale on loop 3

%MWxy.i.4:X15 STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_B3 PV branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.5 STATUS1_B1 No Object Word grouping the differ-ent Process value/Set-point status bits

%MWxy.i.5:X0 HOLD_TOT_B1 Totalizer function state

%MWxy.i.5:X1 PV _SIM_B1 Process value simulation state

%MWxy.i.5:X2 STS_PV_H_LIM_B1 High limit on process val-ue branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.5:X3 STS_PV_L_LIM_B1 Low limit on process value branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.5:X4 STS_SP_H_LIM_B1 High limit on setpoint branch

%MWxy.i.5:X5 STS_SP_B_LIM_B1 Low limit on setpoint branch

%MWxy.i.5:X6 STS_L_R R/L Init State of the Remote/Local selected setpoint

%MWxy.i.5:X7 STS_TR_S_B1 Tracking status bit

%MWxy.i.5:X8 STS_ALARMS_B1 Sum of process value alarms

%MWxy.i.5:X9 STS_HH_B1 Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.5:X10 STS_H_B1 High alarm

%MWxy.i.5:X11 STS_L_B1 Low alarm

%MWxy.i.5:X12 STS_LL_B1 Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.5:X13 STS_DEV_H_B1 High threshold for Process value/Setpoint deviation (>0)


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 327


%MWxy.i.5:X14 STS_DEV_L_B1 Low threshold for Process value/Setpoint deviation (<0)

%MWxy.i.5:X15 STS_THLD_DONE_B1 Totalizer threshold reached

%MWxy.i.6 STATUS2_B1 No Object Word grouping the differ-ent Loop controller/output status bits

%MWxy.i.6:X0 STS_AT_RUNNING_B1 Autotuning in progress (common to 3 loops)

%MWxy.i.6:X1 STS_M_A_B1 PID operating mode state

%MWxy.i.6:X2 STS_RAISE1_B1 Open command

%MWxy.i.6:X3 STS_LOWER1_B1 Close command

%MWxy.i.6:X4 STS_OUT_L_LIM_B1 The calculated output of the PID is greater than or equal to OUT_SUP

%MWxy.i.6:X5 STS_OUT_H_LIM_B1 The calculated output of the PID is smaller than or equal to OUT_INF

%MWxy.i.6:X6 POT_VAL_B1 Servo with copy operation

%MWxy.i.6:X7 RAISE_STOP_B1 Open limit reached on Servo drive (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X8 LOWER_STOP_B1 Close limit reached on Servo drive (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.6:X9 STS_TOP_NEXT_CYC_B1 Sampling pulse on next cycle

%MWxy.i.6:X10 STS_TOP_CUR_CYC_B1 Sampling pulse in current cycle

%MWxy.i.6:X11 OVER_TOT_WARN_B1 Totalizer overflow error (T_MOTOR1_WARN sup-pressed)

%MWxy.i.6:X12 INP_INF_WARN_B1 INP_INF and INP_SUP loop 1 parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X13 SP_MIN_WARN_B1 SP_MIN and SP_MAX loop 1 parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X14 SP_CALC_WARN_B1 Setpoint calculation error


Comment

328 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.6:X15 SP_FLOAT_WARN_B1 Setpoint floating point er-ror


%MWxy.i.7:X0 HOLD_TOT_B2 Totalizer function state

%MWxy.i.7:X1 PV _SIM_B2 Process value simulation state





%MWxy.i.7:X6 STS_L_R_B2 R/L Init State of the Remote/Local selected setpoint










%MWxy.i.8 STATUS2_B2 No Object Word grouping the differ-ent loop controller/output status bits


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 329



%MWxy.i.8:X1 STS_M_A_B2 PID operation state






%MWxy.i.8:X7 RAISE STOP_B2 Open limit reached on ser-vo drive (reserved)

%MWxy.i.8:X8 LOWER STOP_B2 Close limit reached on servo drive (Reserved)


%MWxy.i.8:X10 STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE_B2 Sampling pulse in current cycle



%MWxy.i.8:X13 SP_MIN_WARN_B2 SP_MIN and SP_MAX loop 2 parameter check error



%MWxy.i.9 STATUS1_B3 Word grouping the differ-ent loop 3 Process value/Setpoint status bits

%MWxy.i.9:X0 STS_HOLD_TOT_B3 Totalizer function state

%MWxy.i.9:X1 STS_PV _SIM_B3 Process value simulation state


Comment

330 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000






%MWxy.i.9:X6 STS_L_R_B3 R/L Init Setpoint state












%MWxy.i.1:X1 STS_M_A_B3 PID operation state





Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 331




%MWxy.i.10:X7 RAISE_STOP_B3 Open limit reached on ser-vo drive (reserved)

%MWxy.i.10:X8 LOWER_STOP_B3 Close limit reached on servo drive (Reserved)


%MWxy.i.10:X10 STS_TOP_CUR_CYC_B3 Sampling pulse in current cycle



%MWxy.i.10:X13 SP_MIN_WARN_B3 SP_MIN and SP_SUP loop 3 parameter check error



%MWxy.i.11 STATUS4 No Object Word grouping end of dif-ferent errors diagnostics


%MWxy.i.11:X1 AT_ABORTED Autotuning diagnostics in-terrupted

%MWxy.i.11:X2 AT_ERR_PARAM Autotuning diagnostics parameter error

%MWxy.i.11:X3 AT_PWF_OR_EFB_FAILURE Autotuning diagnostics system error or power fail-ure

%MWxy.i.11:X4 AT_SATUR Autotuning diagnostics process value saturation


Comment

332 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.11:X5 AT_DV_TOO_SMALL Autotuning diagnostics in-sufficient process value deviation

%MWxy.i.11:X6 AT_TSAMP_HIGH Autotuning Diagnostics sampling pulse period too long

%MWxy.i.11:X7 AT_INCONSIST_RESP Autotuning diagnostics in-consistent response

%MWxy.i.11:X8 AT_NOT_STAB_INIT Autotuning diagnostics: initially unstable process value

%MWxy.i.11:X9 AT_TMAX_TOO_SMALL Autotuning diagnostics scale period too small

%MWxy.i.11:X10 AT_NOISE_TOO_HIGH Autotuning diagnostics process value noise too high

%MWxy.i.11:X11 AT_TMAX_TOO_HIGH Autotuning diagnostics scale period too long

%MWxy.i.11:X12 AT_OVERSHOOT Autotuning diagnostics overshoot above 10%

%MWxy.i.11:X13 AT_UNDERSHOOT Autotuning diagnostics non-minimum phase un-dershoot

%MWxy.i.11:X14 AT_UNSYMETRICAL_PT Autotuning diagnostics procedure too non-sym-metrical

%MWxy.i.11:X15 AT_INTEGRATING_PLANT Autotuning diagnostics in-tegrating process

%MWxy.i.12 Reserved

%MWxy.i.13 ORDER_COMMAND Command order



Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 333



Description This table describes the different process control language objects associated with the 3 single loops.

Address Parameter name Default val-ue

Comment



%MFxy.i.20 AT_PERF 0.5 Criteria for autotuning Stability

%MFxy.i.22 T_ECH_B1 0.3 Sampling period

%MFxy.i.24 OUT_MAN_B1 No Object Command value

%MFxy.i.26 DEV_B1 No Object Process value setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.28 PV_B1 No Object Process control value on physical scale

%MFxy.i.30 SP_B1 No Object Value of setpoint on physical scale

%MFxy.i.32 PV_INF_B1 0.0 Low process control limit

%MFxy.i.34 PV_SUP_B1 100.0 High process control limit

%MFxy.i.36 KP_B1 1.0 Proportional coefficient

%MFxy.i.38 TI_B1 0.0 Integral time

%MFxy.i.40 TD_B1 0.0 Derivative time

%MFxy.i.42 OUTBIAS_B1 0.0 Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.44 INT_BAND_B1 0.0 Integral band

%MFxy.i.46 DBAND_B1 0.0 Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.48 OUTRATE_B1 0.0 Limit of output variation speed

%MFxy.i.50 OUT1_INF_B1 0.0 Low limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.52 OUT1_SUP_B1 100.0 High limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.54 SP_INF_B1 0.0 Low setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.56 SP_SUP_B1 100. High setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.58 PV_LL_B1 5.0 Very low process control threshold

%MFxy.i.60 PV_L_B1 5.0 Low process control threshold

%MFxy.i.62 PV_H_B1 95.0 High process control threshold

%MFxy.i.64 PV_HH_B1 95.0 Very high process control thresh-old

%MFxy.i.66 ONOFF_L_B1 -5.0 Low threshold of ON OFF Loop Controller

334 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MFxy.i.68 ONOFF_H_B1 5.0 High threshold of ON OFF Loop Controller

%MFxy.i.70 HYST_B1 0.0 Hysteresis of 3 state ON OFF Loop Controller

%MFxy.i.72 DEV_L_B1 -5.0 Low deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.74 DEV_H_B1 5.0 High deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.76 THLD_B1 1E+8 Totalizing limit

%MFxy.i.78 R_RATE_B1 0.0 Speed limiter ascent speed value

%MFxy.i.80 D_RATE_B1 0.0 Speed limiter descent speed value

%MFxy.i.82 SPEED_LIM_OUT_B1 No Object Speed limiter output value

%MFxy.i.84 INP_MINR_B1 0.0 Remote setpoint loop 1 low scale

%MFxy.i.86 INP_MAXR_B1 100.0 Remote setpoint loop 1 high scale

%MFxy.i.88 T_MOTOR_B1 0.0 Open time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.90 T_MINI_B1 0.0 Minimum open time for valve con-trolled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.92 KP_PREV_B1 No Object Value before proportional coeffi-cient autotuning

%MFxy.i.94 TI_PREV_B1 No Object Value before integral coefficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.96 TD_PREV_B1 No Object Value before derivative coefficient autotuning



%MFxy.i.102 DEV_B2 No Object Process value setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.104 PV_B2 No Object Value of process control on physi-cal scale


%MFxy.i.108 PV_INF_B2 0.0 Low process control limit

%MFxy.i.110 PV_SUP_B2 100.0 High process control limit







Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 335




%MFxy.i.126 OUT1_INF_B2 0.0 Low limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.128 OUT1_SUP_B2 100.0 High limit of Output 1


%MFxy.i.132 SP_SUP_B2 100.0 High setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.134 PV_LL_B2 5.0 Very low process control threshold

%MFxy.i.136 PV_L_B2 5.0 Low process control threshold

%MFxy.i.138 PV_H_B2 95.0 High process control threshold

%MFxy.i.140 PV_HH_B2 95.0 Very high process control thresh-old



%MFxy.i.146 HYST_B2 0.0 Hysteresis of 3 state ON OFF Loop Controller










%MFxy.i.166 T_MINI_B2 0.0 Minimum open time for valve con-trolled by the servo drive





Comment

336 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000




%MFxy.i.178 DEV_B3 No Object Setpoint process control deviation

%MFxy.i.180 PV_B3 No Object Value of process control on physi-cal scale


%MFxy.i.184 PV_INF_B3 0.0 Low process value limit

%MFxy.i.186 PV_SUP_B3 100.0 High process value limit








%MFxy.i.202 OUT_INF_B3 0.0 Low limit of output 1

%MFxy.i.204 OUT_SUP_B3 100.0 High limit of output 1


%MFxy.i.208 SP_SUP_B3 100.0 High setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.210 PV_LL_B3 5.0 Very low measurement threshold

%MFxy.i.212 PV_L_B3 5.0 Low measurement threshold

%MFxy.i.214 PV_H_B3 95.0 High measurement threshold

%MFxy.i.216 PV_HH_B3 95.0 Very high measurement threshold



%MFxy.i.222 HYST1_B3 0.0 Hysteresis of 3 state ON OFF Loop Controller







Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 337






%MFxy.i.242 T_MINI1_B3 0.0 Minimum open time for valve con-trolled by the servo drive




%MWxy.i.250 PV_SIM_B1 No Object Simulated measurement value loop 1




Comment

338 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


11.4 Language objects associated with the single loop cascade

At a Glance


This section describes the cascade loop language objects.



Topic Page


Fault and diagnostics language objects 346


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 339



Description This table describes the configuration language objects associated with the single loop cascade.


%KWxy.i.0 CONFIG_0_M No Object Word bringing together the dif-ferent configuration bits of the process value

%KWxy.i.0:X0 Filtering Missing (0) Filtering function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X1 Function generator Missing (0) Function generator of the pro-cess value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X2 Totalizer No Object Totalizer function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X3 Square root Missing (0) Square root function of the pro-cess value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X4 Alarms Present Alarm function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.0:X8 PV_CLIP Missing (0) Lopping or non-lopping of the process value

%KWxy.i.0:X9 EXTRAPOL No (0) Extrapolation of function gener-ator

%KWxy.i.0:X10 PV_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0) Type: unipolar/bipolar of the process value

%KWxy.i.0:X11 PV_EXTERNE Not selected (0) Choice of standard process val-ue (0) / external process value (1)

%KWxy.i.1 CONFIG_1_M No Object Word grouping the different set-point configuration bits

%KWxy.i.1:X0 SP_Simple Selected (1) Type of setpoint selected: single

%KWxy.i.1:X1 SP_Selection Not selected (0) Type of setpoint: selection

%KWxy.i.1:X2 Speed_Limiteur Not selected (0) Speed limiter on the setpoint


%KWxy.i.1:X4 RL/L Local remote (0) Speed limiter either on the local setpoint or in Remote/Local mode

340 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%KWxy.i.1:X8 Sel_Min Missing (0) Function selected for setpoint type Selection

%KWxy.i.1:X9 Sel_Max Missing (0) Function selected for setpoint type Selection

%KWxy.i.1:X10 SEL_SWITCH Present on Se-lection

Function selected for setpoint type Selection

%KWxy.i.1:X11 R/L_INIT Local (1) Initial value of the Remote/Local selected setpoint


%KWxy.i.1:X13 SP_Ratio Not selected (0) Type of setpoint selected: Ratio

%KWxy.i.1:X14 SP_Limiteur Not present Setpoint limiter (e.g. PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.1:X15 SP_Folw No setpoint Tracking setpoint (0)

%KWxy.i.2 CONFIG_2_M No Object Word bringing together the dif-ferent loop controller configura-tion bits and Feed Forward

%KWxy.i.2:X0 PID Present (always) PID function of the loop control-ler branch

%KWxy.i.2:X1 ONOFF2 No Object ON OFF 2 states branch of loop controller


%KWxy.i.2:X3 SPLRG/HOTCOLD No Object OR Hot/Cold and Split Range presence bits

%KWxy.i.2:X4 Split/Range No Object Loop controller branch Split Range function

%KWxy.i.2:X5 Hot/Cold No Object Hot/Cold function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X6 ALARMES_DEV Present Alarm function on diversion of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.2:X7 Feed Forward Missing (0) Presence of a Feed forward in-put

%KWxy.i.2:X8 BUMP With bumps (1) Management bumps when changing operating mode




TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 341




%KWxy.i.2:X11 REV_DIR PID action Type of inverse loop controller action (0)

%KWxy.i.2:X12 MANU/AUTO_INIT Auto (1) Initial value of loop controller op-erating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X13 Lead lag Missing (0) Leadlag function of the Feed forward branch

%KWxy.i.2:X14 FF_UNI_BIP Unipolar Type of Feed forward process value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.2:X15 IMC Missing (0) IMC function of the loop control-ler branch

%KWxy.i.3 Loop name Loop i with i [0.9] Loop name

%KWxy.i.7 Loop unit Loop unit

%KWxy.i.10 CONFIG_0_E No Object Word grouping the different Pro-cess value configuration bits


%KWxy.i.10:X1 Function generator No Object Function generator of the pro-cess value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X2 Totalizer Missing (0) Totalizer function of the process value branch




%KWxy.i.10:X9 EXTRAPOL No Object Extrapolation of function gener-ator

%KWxy.i.10:X10 PV_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0) Type of process value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.10:X13 Totalizer: Process value unit

1 (X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms (X13=1, X14 =0): phys/s

%KWxy.i.10:X14 Totalizer: Process value unit

0 (X13=0, X14 =1): phys/mn (X13=1, X14 =1): phys/h

%KWxy.i.11 CONFIG_1_E No Object Word grouping the different set-point configuration bits


342 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%KWxy.i.11:X0 SP_Simple Selected (1) Type of setpoint selected: Sin-gle

%KWxy.i.11:X1 SP_Selection No Object Type of setpoint: Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X2 Speed_Limiteur Not selected (0) Speed limiter on the setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X3 SP_SPP No Object Type of setpoint selected: Pro-grammer

%KWxy.i.11:X4 RL/L Local remote (0) Speed limiter either on the local setpoint or in Remote/Local mode

%KWxy.i.11:X8 Sel_Min No Object Function selected for setpoint type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X9 Sel_max No Object Function selected for setpoint type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X10 Sel_switch No Object Function selected for setpoint type Selection


%KWxy.i.11:X12 R1/R2_INIT No Object Initial value of the status of the selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X13 SP_Ratio No Object Type of setpoint selected: Ratio


%KWxy.i.11:X15 SP_Folw Non tracking setpoint (0)

Tracking setpoint

%KWxy.i.12 CONFIG_2_E No Object Word bringing together the dif-ferent loop controller configura-tion bits and Feed forward

%KWxy.i.12:X0 PID Present (always) PID function of the loop control-ler branch



%KWxy.i.12:X3 SPLRG/HotCold No Object Or Hot/Cold and Split Range presence bits

%KWxy.i.12:X4 Split/Range Missing (0) Loop controller branch Split Range function


TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 343


%KWxy.i.12:X5 Hot/Cold Not selected Hot/Cold function of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.12:X6 Alarmes_DEV Present Alarm function on diversion of the loop controller branch

%KWxy.i.12:X7 Feed Forward No Object Presence of a Feed forward in-put






%KWxy.i.12:X11 REV_DIR PID action Type of inverse loop controller action (0)

%KWxy.i.12:X12 MANU/AUTO_INIT Manu (0) Initial value of loop controller op-erating mode

%KWxy.i.12:X13 Lead lag No Object Leadlag function of the Feed forward branch

%KWxy.i.12:X14 FF_UNI_BIP No Object Type of Feed forward process value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.12:X15 IMC Missing (0) IMC function of the loop control-ler branch

%KWxy.i.13 CONFIG_3_E No Object Word grouping the different out-put configuration bits

%KWxy.i.13:X0 Servo Not selected Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.13:X1 Servo2 Not selected Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.13:X2 Analog1 Not selected Type of output selected: Analog

%KWxy.i.13:X3 Analog2 Not selected Type of output selected: Analog






%KWxy.i.13:X11 POT_VAL2_INIT Yes (1) Presence of (Reserved) Servo copy

%KWxy.i.13:X12 ANALOG1_UNI_BIP Unipolar Type of analog output: unipolar or bipolar


344 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%KWxy.i.13:X13 ANALOG2_UNI_BIP Unipolar (0) Type of analog output: unipolar or bipolar




TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 345


Fault and diagnostics language objects

Description This table shows the fault and diagnostics language objects associated with the sin-gle loop cascade.


Comment





%MWxy.i.2:X5 CONF_FLT Configuration fault

%MWxy.i.2:X6 MISSING_ADDR_M Missing IMC master loop register address

%MWxy.i.2:X7 WARN Sum of errors

%MWxy.i.2:X8 STS_ERR_CALC_CORR_M Master loop controller branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.2:X9 STS_ERR_FLOT_CORR_M Master loop controller branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X10 STS_ERR_CALC_PV_M Master PV branch calcu-lation error

%MWxy.i.2:X11 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_M Master PV branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X12 STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_M Master PV branch incor-rect scale

%MWxy.i.3 CH_STATUS2 Channel state

%MWxy.i.3:X0 STS_ERR_CALC_OUT OUT branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.3:X1 STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT OUT branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.3:X2 STS_ERR_TH_SPLRG Split Range function thresholds incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X3 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1 OUT1 branch scale incor-rect

%MWxy.i.3:X4 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT2 OUT2 branch scale incor-rect

%MWxy.i.3:X5 STS_ERR_COPY_POS Missing position copy ad-dress

346 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.3:X6 MISSING_ADDR_E Missing IMC slave loop register address

%MWxy.i.3:X8 STS_ERR_CALC_CORR Slave loop controller branch calculation error

%MWxy.i.3:X9 STS_ERR_FLOT_CORR_E Slave loop controller branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.3:X10 STS_ERR_CALC_PV_E Slave PV branch calcula-tion error

%MWxy.i.3:X11 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_E Slave PV branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.3:X12 STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_E Slave PV branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.4 STATUS1_M Word grouping the differ-ent Process value/Set-point status bits

%MWxy.i.4:X1 STS_PV_SIM_M Process value simulation state

%MWxy.i.4:X2 STS_PV_H_LIM_M High limit on process val-ue branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.4:X3 STS_PV_L_LIM_M Low limit on process val-ue branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.4:X4 STS_SP_H_LIM_M High limit on setpoint branch (SP_SUP)

%MWxy.i.4:X5 STS_SP_L_LIM_M Low limit on setpoint branch (SP_INF)

%MWxy.i.4:X6 STS_L_R_M R/L Init State of the Remote/Lo-cal selected setpoint

%MWxy.i.4:X7 STS_R1_R2_M State of selected setpoint

%MWxy.i.4:X8 STS_ALARMS_M Sum of process value alarms

%MWxy.i.4:X9 STS_HH_M Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X10 STS_H_M High alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X11 STS_L_M Low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X12 STS_LL_M Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X13 STS_DEV_H_M High threshold for Pro-cess value/Setpoint devi-ation (>0)


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 347


%MWxy.i.4:X14 STS_DEV_L_M Low threshold for Process value/Setpoint deviation (<0)

%MWxy.i.5 STATUS2_M No Object Word grouping the differ-ent status bits of the slave loop controller

%MWxy.i.5:X0 STS_AT_RUNNING_M Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.5:X1 STS_TR_S_M PID in tracking mode (open cascade)

%MWxy.i.5:X3 STS_M_A_M PID operation state

%MWxy.i.5:X8 STS_OUT_L_LIM_M Low limit of output reached

%MWxy.i.5:X9 STS_OUT_H_LIM_M High limit of output reached

%MWxy.i.5:X10 STS_TOP_NEXT_CYC_M Sampling pulse on next cycle

%MWxy.i.5:X11 STS_TOP_CUR_CYC_M Sampling pulse in current cycle

%MWxy.i.5:X12 STS_FF_SIM_M Simulation state of Feed forward process value

%MWxy.i.5:X13 STS_OUT_CLAMP_LOW Output of slanting master in falling direction

%MWxy.i.5:X14 STS_OUT_CLAMP_HIGH Output of slanting master in rising direction

%MWxy.i.6 STATUS3_M No Object Word grouping end of dif-ferent errors diagnostics (Feed forward process value/setpoint)

%MWxy.i.6:X0 Xi_WARN_M Xi parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X1 Yi_WARN_M Yi parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X2 INP_INFR1_WARN_M INP_INFR1 and INP_SUPR1 parameters check error

%MWxy.i.6:X3 INP_INFR2_WARN_M INP_INFR2 and INP_SUPR2 parameters check error


Comment

348 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.6:X4 RATIO_WARN_M RATIO_MIN and RATIO_MAX parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X5 FF_CALC_WARN_M Feed forward calculation error

%MWxy.i.6:X6 FF_FLOAT_WARN_M Feed forward floating point error

%MWxy.i.6:X7 OUT_FF__WARN_M OUTFF_INF and OUTFF_SUP parame-ters check error

%MWxy.i.6:X9 SP_MIN_WARN_M SP_MIN and SP_MAX parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X10 SP_CALC_WARN_M Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.6:X11 SP_FLOAT_WARN_M Setpoint floating point er-ror

%MWxy.i.7 STATUS1_E Word grouping the differ-ent slave Process value/Setpoint status bits

%MWxy.i.7:X0 STS_HOLD_TOT Totalizer function state

%MWxy.i.7:X1 STS_FORCAGE_PV_E Process value simulation state

%MWxy.i.7:X2 STS_PV_H_LIM_E High limit on process val-ue branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.7:X3 STS_PV_L_LIM_E Low limit on process val-ue branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.7:X4 STS_SP_H_LIM_E High limit on setpoint branch (SP_SUP)

%MWxy.i.7:X5 STS_SP_L_LIM_E Low limit on setpoint branch (SP_INF)

%MWxy.i.7:X6 STS_L_R_E R/L Init State of the Remote/Lo-cal selected setpoint

%MWxy.i.7:X8 STS_ALARMS_E Sum of process value alarms

%MWxy.i.7:X9 STS_HH_E Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X10 STS_H_E High alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X11 STS_L_E Low alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X12 STS_LL_E Very low alarm


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 349


%MWxy.i.7:X13 STS_DEV_H_E High threshold for Pro-cess value/Setpoint devi-ation (>0)

%MWxy.i.7:X14 STS_DEV_L_E Low threshold for Process value/Setpoint deviation (<0)

%MWxy.i.7:X15 STS_THLD_DONE_E Totalizer threshold reached

%MWxy.i.8 STATUS2_E No Object Word grouping the differ-ent status bits of the slave loop controller

%MWxy.i.8:X0 STS_AT_RUNNING_E Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.8:X1 STS_TR_S_E Tracking mode switch

%MWxy.i.8:X2 STS_TR_S No Object Tracking mode switch (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.8:X3 STS_M_A_E PID operation state

%MWxy.i.8:X4 STS_RAISE1_E Open command

%MWxy.i.8:X5 STS_LOWER1_E Close command

%MWxy.i.8:X6 STS_RAISE2_E Branch output 2 open command

%MWxy.i.8:X7 STS_LOWER2_E Branch output 2 close command

%MWxy.i.8:X8 STS_OUT_L_LIM_E The calculated output of the PID is greater than or equal to OUT_SUP

%MWxy.i.8:X9 STS_OUT_H_LIM_E The calculated output of the PID is smaller than or equal to OUT_INF

%MWxy.i.8:X10 STS_TOP_NEXT_CYC_E

%MWxy.i.8:X11 STS_TOP_CUR_CYC_E

%MWxy.i.9 STATUS3_E No Object Word grouping the output diagnostics

%MWxy.i.9:X0 STS_POT_VAL1_E Servo with copy operation

%MWxy.i.9:X1 STS_POT_VAL2_E No Object Servo with copy operation (Reserved)

%MWxy.i.9:X2 STS_RAISE_STOP1_E Open limit reached on servo drive


Comment

350 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.9:X3 STS_LOWER_STOP1_E Close limit reached on servo drive

%MWxy.i.9:X4 STS_RAISE_STOP2_E Open limit reached on servo drive

%MWxy.i.9:X5 STS_LOWER_STOP2_E Close limit reached on servo drive

%MWxy.i.9:X8 STS_OVER_TOT_WARN_E Output capacity over-shoot error on Totalizer

%MWxy.i.9:X9 STS_SP_MIN_WARN_E SP_MIN and SP_MAX parameter check error

%MWxy.i.9:X10 STS_SP_CALC_WARN_E Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.9:X11 STS_SP_FLOAT_WARN_E Setpoint floating point er-ror

%MWxy.i.10 STATUS4 No Object Word grouping autotun-ing diagnostics

%MWxy.i.10:X0 STS_AT_FAILED Autotuning failed

%MWxy.i.10:X1 STS_AT_ABORTED Autotuning diagnostics in-terrupted

%MWxy.i.10:X2 STS_AT_ERR_PARAM Autotuning diagnostics parameter error

%MWxy.i.10:X3 STS_AT_PWF_OR_EFB_FAIL Autotuning diagnostics system error or power fail-ure

%MWxy.i.10:X4 STS_AT_ERR_SATUR Autotuning diagnostics process value saturation

%MWxy.i.10:X5 STS_AT_DV_TOO_SMALL Autotuning diagnostics in-sufficient process value deviation

%MWxy.i.10:X6 STS_AT_TSAMP_HIGH Autotuning Diagnostics sampling pulse period too long

%MWxy.i.10:X7 STS_AT_INCONSIST_RESP Autotuning diagnostics in-consistent response

%MWxy.i.10:X8 STS_AT_NOT_STAB_INIT Autotuning diagnostics: initially unstable process value

%MWxy.i.10:X9 STS_AT_TMAX_TOO_SMALL Autotuning diagnostics scale period too small


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 351


%MWxy.i.10:X10 STS_AT_NOISE_TOO_HIGH Autotuning diagnostics process value noise too loud

%MWxy.i.10:X11 STS_AT_TMAX_TOO_HIGH Autotuning diagnostics scale period too long

%MWxy.i.10:X12 STS_AT_OVERSHOOT Autotuning diagnostics overshoot above 10%

%MWxy.i.10:X13 STS_AT_UNDERSHOOT Autotuning diagnostics non-minimum phase too large

%MWxy.i.10:X14 STS_AT_UNSYMETRICAL_PT Autotuning diagnostics procedure too non-sym-metrical

%MWxy.i.10:X15 STS_AT_INTEGRATING_PT Autotuning diagnostics in-tegrating process

%MWxy.i.11 ORDER _COMMAND Command order



Comment

352 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



Description This table describes the different process control language objects of the cascade loop.


Comment

%MFxy.i.14 AT_STEP 10.0 Size of autotuning scale

%MFxy.i.16 AT_TMAX 100.0 Autotuning scale period

%MFxy.i.18 AT_PERF 0.5 Criteria for autotuning stability

%MFxy.i.20 T_ECH_M 0.3 Master loop sampling period

%MFxy.i.22 OUTFF_M No Object Value of Feed forward action on physical scale

%MFxy.i.24 OUT_MAN_M No Object Command value

%MFxy.i.26 DEV_M No Object Setpoint process value deviation

%MFxy.i.28 PV_M No Object Value of process value on physi-cal scale

%MFxy.i.30 SP_M No Object Value of setpoint on physical scale

%MFxy.i.32 PV_INF_M 0.0 Low process value limit

%MFxy.i.34 PV_SUP_M 100.0 High process value limit

%MFxy.i.36 KP_M 1.0 Proportional co-efficient

%MFxy.i.38 TI_M 0.0 Integral time

%MFxy.i.40 TD_M 0.0 Derived time

%MFxy.i.42 OUTBIAS_M 0.0 Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.44 INT_BAND_M 0.0 Integral band

%MFxy.i.46 DBAND_M 0.0 Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.48 KD_M 10.0 Filtering the derived item

%MFxy.i.50 SP_MIN_M 0.0 Low master setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.52 SP_MAX_M 100.0 High master setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.54 PV_LL_M 5.0 Very low process value threshold

%MFxy.i.56 PV_L_M 5.0 Low process value threshold

%MFxy.i.58 PV_H_M 95.0 High process value threshold

%MFxy.i.60 PV_HH_M 95.0 Very high process value threshold

%MFxy.i.62 RATIO_M 1.0 Ratio value

%MFxy.i.64 RATIO_MIN_M 0.0 Minimum Ratio value

%MFxy.i.66 RATIO_MAX_M 100.0 Maximum Ratio value

%MFxy.i.68 RATIO_BIAS_M 0.0 Value of Ratio bias

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 353


%MFxy.i.70 DEV_L_M 0.0 Low deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.72 DEV_H_M 0.0 High deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.74 T_FILTER_M 0.0 Process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.76 K_FILTER_M 1,0 Multiplication coefficient of pro-cess value filtering

%MFxy.i.78 FILT_OUT_M Value of filter output

%MFxy.i.80 SQRT_OUT_M Output value of square root

%MFxy.i.82 E2_IN_M 1428.0 Abcissae of first pulse of Segment S2






%MFxy.i.94 E2_OUT_M 14.28.0 Coordinate of first pulse of Seg-ment S2

%MFxy.i.96 E3_OUT_M 28.57 Coordinate of first pulse of Seg-ment S3





%MFxy.i.106 R_RATE_M 0.0 Setpoint ascent speed limit

%MFxy.i.108 D_RATE_M 0.0 Setpoint descent speed limit

%MFxy.i.110 SPEED_LIM_OUT_M Value of setpoint speed limiter output

%MFxy.i.112 INP_INFR1_M 0.0 Low scale of the master loop R1 setpoint


Comment

354 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MFxy.i.114 INP_SUPR1_M 100.0 High scale of the master loop R1 setpoint

%MFxy.i.116 INP_INFR2_M 0.0 Low scale of the master loop R2 setpoint

%MFxy.i.118 INP_SUPR2_M 100.0 High scale of the master loop R2 setpoint

%MFxy.i.120 T1_FF_M 0.0 Filtering time for Feed forward process value

%MFxy.i.122 T2_FF_M 0.0 Filtering time for Feed forward process value

%MFxy.i.124 OUT_FF_INF_M 0.0 Low limit of Feed forward action

%MFxy.i.126 OUT_FF_SUP_M 100.0 High limit of Feed forward action

%MFxy.i.128 KP_PREV_M No Object Value before proportional co-effi-cient autotuning

%MFxy.i.130 TI_PREV_M No Object Value before integral co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.132 TD_PREV_M No Object Value before derived co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.134 OUT1_E No Object Value of output command 1

%MFxy.i.136 OUT2_E No Object Value of output command 2

%MFxy.i.138 T_ECH_E 0.3 Slave loop sampling period

%MFxy.i.140 OUT_MAN_E No Object Slave loop command value

%MFxy.i.142 DEV_E No Object Setpoint process value deviation

%MFxy.i.144 PV_E No Object Value of process value on Physi-cal scale

%MFxy.i.146 SP_E No Object Value of setpoint on Physical scale

%MFxy.i.148 PV_INF_E 0.0 Low process value limit

%MFxy.i.150 PV_SUP_E 100.0 High process value limit

%MFxy.i.152 KP_E 1.0 Proportional co-efficient

%MFxy.i.154 TI_E 0.0 Integral time

%MFxy.i.156 TD_E 0.0 Derived time

%MFxy.i.158 OUTBIAS_E 0.0 Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.160 INT_BAND_E 0.0 Integral band

%MFxy.i.162 DBAND_E 0.0 Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.164 KD_E 10.0 Filtering the derived item


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 355


%MFxy.i.166 OUTRATE_E 0.0 Limit of output variation speed

%MFxy.i.168 OUTRATE2_E 0,0 Limit of output 2 variation speed

%MFxy.i.170 OUT1_INF_E 0.0 Low limit of output 1

%MFxy.i.172 OUT1_SUP_E 100.0 High limit of output 1

%MFxy.i.174 SP_MIN_E 0.0 Low setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.176 SP_MAX_E 100.0 High setpoint limit

%MFxy.i.178 OUT2_INF_E 0.0 Low limit of Output 2

%MFxy.i.180 OUT2_SUP_E 100.0 High limit of Output 2

%MFxy.i.182 OUT1_TH1_E 0.0 Threshold 1 for Hot/Cold or Split Range output 1




%MFxy.i.190 PV_LL_E 5.0 Very low process value threshold

%MFxy.i.192 PV_L_E 5.0 Low process value threshold

%MFxy.i.194 PV_H_E 95.0 High process value threshold

%MFxy.i.196 PV_HH_E 95.0 Very high process value threshold

%MFxy.i.198 DEV_L_E 0.0 Low deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.200 DEV_H_E 0.0 High deviation threshold

%MFxy.i.202 T_FILTER_E 0.0 Process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.204 K_FILTER_E 1.0 Multiplication coefficient of pro-cess value filtering

%MFxy.i.206 FILT_OUT_E No Object Value of filter output

%MFxy.i.208 SQRT_OUT_E No Object Output value of square root

%MFxy.i.210 THLD_E 1E+8 Totalizer limit

%MFxy.i.212 R_RATE_E 0.0 Setpoint ascent speed limit

%MFxy.i.214 D_RATE_E 0.0 Setpoint descent speed limit

%MFxy.i.216 SPEED_LIM_OUT_E No Object Value of setpoint speed limiter output

%MFxy.i.218 T_MOTOR1_E 10.0 Open time for valve controlled by the servo drive


Comment

356 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MFxy.i.220 T_MINI1_E 0.0 Minimum open time for valve con-trolled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.222 T_MOTOR2_E 10.0 Open time for valve controlled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.224 T_MINI2_E 0.0 Minimum open time for valve con-trolled by the servo drive

%MFxy.i.226 KP_PREV_E No Object Value before proportional co-effi-cient autotuning

%MFxy.i.228 TI_PREV_E No Object Value before integral co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.230 TD_PREV_E No Object Value before derived co-efficient autotuning




%MFxy.i.238 CL_PERF 0.1 BO / BF time report

%MFxy.i.240 T_MOTOR_B3 No Object Open time for valve controlled by the servo drive loop 3

%MFxy.i.242 T_MINI_B No Object Minimum open time for valve con-trolled by the servo drive loop 3

%MFxy.i.244 KP_PREV_B3 No Object Value before proportional co-effi-cient autotuning loop 3

%MFxy.i.246 TI_PREV_B3 No Object Value before integral co-efficient autotuning loop 3

%MWxy.i.248 PV_SIM_M No Object Simulated process value value

%MWxy.i.249 PV_SIM_E No Object Simulated process value value

%MWxy.i.250 FF_SIM_M No Object Simulated Feed forward input


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 357


11.5 Language objects associated with the self-selec-tive loop

At a Glance


This section describes the language objects of the self-selective loops.



Topic Page




358 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



Description This table describes the configuration language objects associated with the auto-se-lector loop.


%KWxy.i.0 CONFIG_0_C1 No Object Word grouping the different configuration bits of the C1 pro-cess value


%KWxy.i.0:X1 Function generator Missing (0) Function generator of the pro-cess value branch





%KWxy.i.0:X9 EXTRAPOL No (0) Extrapolation of function gener-ator


%KWxy.i.0:X11 PV_EXTERNE Missing (0) Choice of standard process val-ue (0) / external process value (1)

%KWxy.i.0:X13 Totalizer process value unit

1 (X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms(X13=1, X14 =0): phys/s


0 (X13=0, X14 =1): phys/mn(X13=1, X14 =1): phys/h

%KWxy.i.1 CONFIG_1_C1 No Object Word grouping the different configuration bits of the C1 Set-point


%KWxy.i.1:X1 SP_Selection Not selected (0) Type of setpoint: Selection

%KWxy.i.1:X2 Speed_Limiteur Not selected (0) Setpoint speed limiter

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 359



%KWxy.i.1:X4 LR/L Local Remote (0)

Speed limiter either on the local setpoint or in Remote/Local mode

%KWxy.i.1:X8 Sel_Min Missing (0) Function selected in the event of a Selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X9 Sel_Max Missing (0) Function selected in the event of a Selection setpoint

%KWxy.i.1:X10 Sel_Switch Present on se-lection

Function selected in the event of a Selection setpoint



%KWxy.i.1:X13 SP_Ratio Not selected (0) Type of setpoint selected: Ratio


%KWxy.i.1:X15 SP_Folw No tracking Tracking (0)

%KWxy.i.2 CONFIG_2_C1 No Object Word grouping the different loop controller configuration bits and C1 Feed forward

%KWxy.i.2:X0 PID Always present PID function of the loop control-ler branch



%KWxy.i.2:X3 SPLRG/HotCold No Object OR Hot/Cold and Split Range presence bits

%KWxy.i.2:X4 Split/Range Missing (0) Split Range function for branch selected

%KWxy.i.2:X5 Hot / Cold Not selected Hot/Cold function for the branch selected


%KWxy.i.2:X7 Feed Forward Missing (0) Presence of a Feed forward in-put


360 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000







%KWxy.i.2:X11 REV_DIR PID backward action (0)


%KWxy.i.2:X12 MANU/AUTO_INIT Auto (1) Initial value of loop controller operating mode

%KWxy.i.2:X13 Lead lag Missing (0) Leadlag function of the Feed forward branch

%KWxy.i.2:X14 FF_UNI_BIP Unipolar Type of Feed forward process value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.2:X15 IMC Missing (0) Model loop controller in branch loop controller



%KWxy.i.10 CONFIG_0_C2 No Object Word grouping the different configuration bits of the C2 pro-cess value

%KWxy.i.10:X0 Filtering No object Filtering function of the process value branch

%KWxy.i.10:X1 Function generator No Object Function generator of the pro-cess value branch





%KWxy.i.10:X9 EXTRAPOL No object Extrapolation of function gener-ator



TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 361


%KWxy.i.10:X11 PV_EXTERNE Missing (0) Choice of Standard Process value (0) / External Process val-ue (1)


1 (X13=0, X14 =0): phys/ms (X13=1, X14 =0): phys/s


0 (X13=0, X14 =1): phys/mn (X13=1, X14 =1): phys/h

%KWxy.i.11 CONFIG_1_C2 No Object Word grouping the different configuration bits of the C2 Set-point


%KWxy.i.11:X1 SP_Selection No Object Type of setpoint selected: Se-lection

%KWxy.i.11:X2 SPEED_LIMITEUR Missing (0) Setpoint speed limiter

%KWxy.i.11:X3 SP_SPP No Object Type of setpoint selected: Pro-grammer

%KWxy.i.11:X4 LR/L Local Remote (0)

Speed limiter either on the local setpoint or in Remote/Local mode

%KWxy.i.11:X8 SEL_MIN No Object Function selected for setpoint type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X9 SEL_MAX No Object Function selected for setpoint type Selection

%KWxy.i.11:X10 SEL_SWITCH No Object Function selected for setpoint type Selection


%KWxy.i.11:X12 R1/R2_INIT No Object Initial value of the status of the selected setpoint

%KWxy.i.11:X13 SP_RATIO No Object Type of setpoint selected: Ratio

%KWxy.i.11:X14 SP_LIMITEUR Not present (0) Setpoint limiter (e.g. PARAM_SP)

%KWxy.i.11:X15 SP_FOLW No setpoint Tracking (0)

%KWxy.i.12 CONFIG_2_C2 No Object Word grouping the different loop controller configuration bits and C2 Feed forward

%KWxy.i.12:X0 PID Present (al-ways)

PID function of the loop control-ler branch


362 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000




%KWxy.i.12:X3 SPLRG/HOTCOLD No Object OR Hot/Cold and Split Range presence bits

%KWxy.i.12:X4 Split/Range No Object Loop controller branch Split Range function

%KWxy.i.12:X5 Hot / Cold No Object Hot/Cold function of the loop controller branch


%KWxy.i.12:X7 Feed Forward No Object Presence of a Feed forward in-put






%KWxy.i.12:X11 REV_DIR PID backward action (0)


%KWxy.i.12:X12 MANU/AUTO_INIT Auto (1) Initial value of loop controller operating mode

%KWxy.i.12:X13 Lead lag No Object Leadlag function of the Feed forward branch

%KWxy.i.12:X14 FF_UNI_BIP No Object Type of Feed forward process value: unipolar or bipolar

%KWxy.i.12:X15 IMC Missing (0) Model loop controller in branch loop controller

%KWxy.i.13 CONFIG_3_C2 No Object Word grouping the different out-put configuration bits

%KWxy.i.13:X0 Servo Not selected Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.13:X1 Servo2 Not selected Type of output selected: Servo

%KWxy.i.13:X2 Analog 1 Not selected Type of output selected: Analog

%KWxy.i.13:X3 Analog 2 Not selected Type of output selected: Analog




TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 363










%KWxy.i.21 CONFIG_0_G No Object Word grouping the different configuration bits of the global loop

%KWxy.i.21:X0 MANU/AUTO_G_INIT

Manu (0) Initial operating value of global loop

%KWxy.i.21:X1 AM_G_PID On the global loop (0)

Managing A/M blocks initially: on A/M block 0 on the global loop

%KWxy.i.21:X2 At 1: A/M blocks on each PID

%KWxy.i.21:X8 MIN_MAX Min (0) Initial behavior of the auto-se-lector

%KWxy.i.21:X9 AS_INIT Present (1) Output obtained by restriction on initialization = auto-selector output

%KWxy.i.21:X10 DIR1_INIT Missing (0) Output obtained by restriction on initialization = PID n°1 output

%KWxy.i.21:X11 DIR2_INIT Missing (0) Output obtained by restriction on initialization = PID n°2 output


364 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



Description This table describes the fault and diagnostics language objects associated with the auto-selector loop.


Comment





%MWxy.i.2:X5 CONF_FLT Configuration fault

%MWxy.i.2:X6 MISSING_ADDR_2 Missing secondary loop IMC register address

%MWxy.i.2:X7 WARN Sum of warnings

%MWxy.i.2:X8 STS_ERR_CALC_CORR_B2 Loop controller branch cal-culation error

%MWxy.i.2:X9 STS_ERR_FLOT_CORR_B2 Loop controller branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X10 STS_ERR_CALC_PV_B2 PV branch calculation er-ror

%MWxy.i.2:X11 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_B2 PV branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.2:X12 STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_B2 PV1 branch scale incorrect

%MWxy.i.3 CH_STATUS2 Channel state

%MWxy.i.3:X0 STS_ERR_CALC_OUT OUT branch calculation er-ror

%MWxy.i.3:X1 STS_ERR_FLOT_OUT OUT branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.3:X2 STS_ERR_TH_SPLRG Split Range function thresholds incorrect

%MWxy.i.3:X3 STS_ERR_CALC_CONT Secondary branch calcula-tion error

%MWxy.i.3:X4 STS_ERR_COPY_POS Missing position copy ad-dress

%MWxy.i.3:X6 MISSING_ADDR_1 Missing main loop IMC register address

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 365


%MWxy.i.3:X8 STS_ERR_CALC_CORR_1 Loop controller branch cal-culation error

%MWxy.i.3:X10 STS_ERR_CALC_PV_1 PV branch calculation er-ror

%MWxy.i.3:X11 STS_ERR_FLOT_PV_1 PV branch floating point error

%MWxy.i.3:X12 STS_ERR_SCALE_PV_1 PV branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3:X13 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT1 C1 branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3:X14 STS_ERR_SCALE_OUT2 C2 branch incorrect scale

%MWxy.i.3:X15 STS_ERR_SCALE OR scale errors

%MWxy.i.4 STATUS1_C1 Word grouping the differ-ent Process value/Setpoint status bits of the main loop

%MWxy.i.4:X0 STS_HOLD_TOT_C1 Totalizer function freeze

%MWxy.i.4:X1 STS_PV_SIM_C1 Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.4:X2 STS_PV_H_LIM_C1 High limit on process value

%MWxy.i.4:X3 STS_PV_L_LIM_C1 Low limit on process value

%MWxy.i.4:X4 STS_SP_H_LIM_C1 High limit on setpoint

%MWxy.i.4:X5 STS_SP_L_LIM_C1 Low limit on setpoint

%MWxy.i.4:X6 STS_L_R_C1 R/L Init Remote Setpoint (1) Local Setpoint (0)

%MWxy.i.4:X7 STS_R1_R2_C1 Remote2 Setpoint (1) Remote1 Setpoint (0)

%MWxy.i.4:X8 STS_ALARMS_C1 OR logic of process value alarms

%MWxy.i.4:X9 STS_HH_C1 Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X10 STS_H_C1 High alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X11 STS_L_C1 Low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X12 STS_LL_C1 Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.4:X13 STS_DEV_H_C1 High alarm for Process val-ue/Setpoint deviation (>0)

%MWxy.i.4:X14 STS_DEV_L_C1 Low alarm for Process val-ue/Setpoint deviation (<0)

%MWxy.i.4:X15 STS_THLD_DONE_C1 Totalizer threshold reached


Comment

366 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.5 STATUS2_C1 No Object Word grouping the differ-ent Loop controller status bits of the main loop

%MWxy.i.5:X0 STS_AT_RUNNING_C1 Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.5:X1 STS_M_A_C1 PID operation state

%MWxy.i.5:X2 STS_FF_SIM_C1 Simulation state of Feed forward process value

%MWxy.i.5:X6 STS_TOP_NEXT_CYCLE Sampling pulse on next cy-cle

%MWxy.i.5:X7 STS_TOP_CUR_CYCLE Sampling pulse in current cycle

%MWxy.i.5:X8 STS_TR_S Tracking in progress on the global loop

%MWxy.i.5:X9 STS_M_A Global Manu / Auto

%MWxy.i.5:X10 STS_RAISE1 Open command (global loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X11 STS_LOWER1 Close command (global loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X12 STS_RAISE2 Output 2 branch open command (global loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X13 STS_LOWER2 Output 2 branch close command (global loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X14 STS_OUT_L_LIM Upper limit reached for the PID output selected (global loop)

%MWxy.i.5:X15 STS_OUT_H_LIM Low limit reached for the PID output selected (global loop)

%MWxy.i.6 STATUS3_C1 No Object Word grouping end of dif-ferent diagnostics warn-ings (process value, setpoint, Feed forward) main loop

%MWxy.i.6:X0 Xi_WARN_C1 Xi parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X1 Yi_WARN_C1 Yi parameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X2 RATIO_WARN_C1 RATIO_MIN and RATIO_MAX parameter check error


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 367


%MWxy.i.6:X3 FF_CALC_WARN_C1 Feed forward calculation error

%MWxy.i.6:X4 FF_FLOAT_WARN_C1 Feed forward floating point error

%MWxy.i.6:X5 OUT_FF__WARN_C1 OUTFF_INF and OUTFF_SUP parameters check error

%MWxy.i.6:X8 INP_INFR1_WARN_C1 INP_INFR1 and INP_SUPR1 parameters check error


%MWxy.i.6:X10 SP_MIN_WARN_C1 SP_MIN and SP_MAX pa-rameter check error

%MWxy.i.6:X11 SP_CALC_WARN_C1 Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.6:X12 SP_FLOAT_WARN_C1 Setpoint floating point error

%MWxy.i.6:X13 OVER_TOT_WARN_C1 Error on totalizer overflow

%MWxy.i.7 STATUS1_C2 No Object Word grouping the differ-ent Process value/Setpoint status bits of the Second-ary loop

%MWxy.i.7:X1 STS_PV_SIM_C2 Process value simulation status

%MWxy.i.7:X2 STS_PV_H_LIM_C2 High limit on process value branch (PV_SUP)

%MWxy.i.7:X3 STS_PV_L_LIM_C2 Low limit on process value branch (PV_INF)

%MWxy.i.7:X4 STS_SP_H_LIM_C2 High limit on setpoint branch

%MWxy.i.7:X5 STS_SP_B_LIM_C2 Low limit on setpoint branch

%MWxy.i.7:X6 STS_L_R_C2 R/L Init Remote Setpoint (1) Local Setpoint (0)

%MWxy.i.7:X8 STS_ALARMS_C2 Sum of process value alarms

%MWxy.i.7:X9 STS_HH_C2 Very high alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X10 STS_H_C2 High alarm


Comment

368 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.7:X11 STS_L_C2 Low alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X12 STS_LL_C2 Very low alarm

%MWxy.i.7:X13 STS_DEV_H_C2 High threshold for Process value/Setpoint deviation (>0)

%MWxy.i.7:X14 STS_DEV_L_C2 Low threshold for Process value/Setpoint deviation (<0)

%MWxy.i.7:X15 STS_THLD_DONE_C2 Totalizer threshold reached

%MWxy.i.8 STATUS2_C2 No Object Word grouping the differ-ent loop controller/setpoint status bits of the Second-ary loop

%MWxy.i.8:X0 STS_AT_RUNNING_C2 Autotuning in progress

%MWxy.i.8:X1 STS_M_A_C2 PID operation state


%MWxy.i.8:X9

%MWxy.i.8:X10 SP_MIN_WARN_C2 SP_MIN and SP_MAX pa-rameter check error

%MWxy.i.8:X11 SP_CALC_WARN_C2 Setpoint calculation error

%MWxy.i.8:X12 SP_FLOAT_WARN_C2 Setpoint floating point error

%MWxy.i.8:X13 OVER_TOT_WARN_C2 Totalizer overflow error

%MWxy.i.9 STATUS3 No Object Word grouping the differ-ent output bits

%MWxy.i.9:X0 STS_POT_VAL1 Servo with copy operation (global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X1 STS_POT_VAL2 Servo with copy operation (global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X2 STS_RAISE STOP1 Open limit reached on Ser-vo drive (global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X3 STS_LOWER STOP1 Close limit reached on Ser-vo drive (global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X4 STS_RAISE STOP2 Open limit reached on Ser-vo drive (global loop)


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 369


%MWxy.i.9:X5 STS_LOWER STOP2 Close limit reached on Ser-vo drive (global loop)

%MWxy.i.9:X8 STS_AS Selector positioned on the auto-selector

%MWxy.i.9:X9 STS_DIR1 Selector positioned on PID1 output

%MWxy.i.9:X10 STS_DIR2 Selector positioned on PID2 output

%MWxy.i.9:X11 STS_SEL_PID1 1: Selected output = PID1 output0: Selected output = PID2 output

%MWxy.i.10 STATUS4 No Object Word grouping autotuning diagnostics


%MWxy.i.10:X1 AT_ABORTED Autotuning diagnostics in-terrupted

%MWxy.i.10:X2 AT_ERR_PARAM Autotuning diagnostics pa-rameter error

%MWxy.i.10:X3 AT_PWF_OR_EFB_FAIL Autotuning diagnostics system error or power fail-ure

%MWxy.i.10:X4 AT_ERR_SATUR Autotuning diagnostics process value saturation

%MWxy.i.10:X5 AT_DV_TOO_SMALL Autotuning diagnostics in-sufficient process value deviation

%MWxy.i.10:X6 AT_TSAMP_HIGH Autotuning Diagnostics sampling pulse period too long

%MWxy.i.10:X7 AT_INCONSIST_RESP Autotuning diagnostics in-consistent response

%MWxy.i.10:X8 AT_NOT_STAB_INIT Autotuning diagnostics: ini-tially unstable process val-ue

%MWxy.i.10:X9 AT_TMAX_TOO_SMALL Autotuning diagnostics grade period too small


Comment

370 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MWxy.i.10:X10 AT_NOISE_TOO_HIGH Autotuning diagnostics process value noise too loud

%MWxy.i.10:X11 AT_TMAX_TOO_HIGH Autotuning diagnostics grade period too long

%MWxy.i.10:X12 AT_OVERSHOOT Autotuning diagnostics overshoot above 10%

%MWxy.i.10:X13 AT_UNDERSHOOT Autotuning diagnostics non-minimum phase too large

%MWxy.i.10:X14 AT_UNSYMETRICAL_PT Autotuning diagnostics procedure too non-sym-metrical

%MWxy.i.10:X15 AT_INTEGRATING_PT Autotuning diagnostics in-tegrating process

%MWxy.i.11 ORDER_COMMAND Order Command

%MDxy.i.12 PARAM_COMMAND Parameter Command


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 371



Description This table describes the process control language objects associated with the auto-selector loop channel.


Comment



%MFxy.i.18 AT_PERF 0.5 Autotuning stability criteri-on

%MFxy.i.20 T_ECH 0.3 Sampling period (common to the two PID)

%MFxy.i.22 OUT1 No object Heat/Cool or Split Range output 1 command value

%MFxy.i.24 OUT2 No object Heat/Cool or Split Range output 2 command value

%MFxy.i.26 OUTD No object Global loop command vari-ation value

%MFxy.i.28 OUT_MAN No object Value of global command (loop controller output val-ue selected after process-ing via OUTRATE and limitations)

%MFxy.i.30 OUTFF_C1 No Object Value of Feed forward ac-tion on main loop Physical scale

%MFxy.i.32 OUT_MAN_C1 No object Main loop command value

%MFxy.i.34 DEV_C1 No Object Main loop process value setpoint deviation

%MFxy.i.36 PV_C1 No Object PV value on physical scale

%MFxy.i.38 SP_C1 No Object Setpoint value on Physical scale

%MFxy.i.40 PV_INF_C1 0.0 Process value low limit

%MFxy.i.42 PV_SUP_C1 100.0 Process value high limit

%MFxy.i.44 KP_C1 1.0 Proportional coefficient

%MFxy.i.46 TI_C1 0.0 Integral time

%MFxy.i.48 TD_C1 0.0 Derivative time

372 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MFxy.i.50 OUTBIAS_C1 0.0 Bias on main loop PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.52 INT_BAND_C1 0.0 Integral band

%MFxy.i.54 DBAND_C1 0.0 Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.56 KD_C1 10.0 Derivative filtering

%MFxy.i.58 SP_MIN_C1 0.0 Setpoint low limit

%MFxy.i.60 SP_MAX_C1 100.0 Setpoint high limit

%MFxy.i.62 PV_LL_C1 5.0 Process value threshold very low

%MFxy.i.64 PV_L_C1 5.0 Process value threshold low

%MFxy.i.66 PV_H_C1 95.0 Process value threshold high

%MFxy.i.68 PV_HH_C1 95.0 Process value threshold

%MFxy.i.70 RATIO_C1 1.0 Ratio Value

%MFxy.i.72 RATIO_MIN_C1 0.0 Minimum Ratio value

%MFxy.i.74 RATIO_MAX_C1 100.0 Maximum Ratio value

%MFxy.i.76 RATIO_BIAS_C1 0.0 Ratio bias Value

%MFxy.i.78 DEV_L_C1 -5.0 Deviation low threshold

%MFxy.i.80 DEV_H_C1 5.0 Deviation high threshold

%MFxy.i.82 T_FILTER_C1 0.0 Process value filtering time

%MFxy.i.84 K_FILTER_C1 1.0 Multiplication coefficient of process value filtering

%MFxy.i.86 FILT_OUT_C1 No object Filtering output value

%MFxy.i.88 SQR_OUT_C1 No object Square root output value

%MFxy.i.90 E2_IN_C1 1428.0 Segment S2 input value






%MFxy.i.102 E2_OUT_C1 14.28 Segment S2 output value





Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 373




%MFxy.i.114 THLD_C1 1E+8 Totalizing limit

%MFxy.i.116 R_RATE_C1 0.0 Setpoint speed increase limit

%MFxy.i.118 D_RATE_C1 0.0 Setpoint speed decrease limit

%MFxy.i.120 SPEED_LIM_OUT_C1 No object Setpoint velocity limiter output value

%MFxy.i.122 INP_INFR1_C1 0.0 Main loop R1 setpoint low scale

%MFxy.i.124 INP_SUPR1_C1 100.0 Main loop R1 setpoint high scale

%MFxy.i.126 INP_INFR2_C1 0.0 Main loop R2 setpoint low scale

%MFxy.i.128 INP_SUPR2_C1 100.0 Main loop R2 setpoint high scale

%MFxy.i.130 T1_FF_C1 0.0 Feed forward process val-ue filtering time

%MFxy.i.132 T2_FF_C1 0.0 Feed forward process val-ue filtering time

%MFxy.i.134 OUT_FF_INF_C1 0.0 Feed forward process val-ue low limit

%MFxy.i.136 OUT_FF_SUP_C1 100.0 Feed forward process val-ue high limit

%MFxy.i.138 KP_PREV_C1 No Object Value before proportional co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.140 TI_PREV_C1 No Object Value before integral co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.142 TD_PREV_C1 No Object Value before derived co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.144 OUT_MAN_C2 No Object Secondary loop command value

%MFxy.i.146 DEV_C2 No Object Process value/setpoint de-viation

%MFxy.i.148 PV_C2 No Object PV value on physical scale


Comment

374 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


%MFxy.i.150 SP_C2 No Object Setpoint value on Physical scale

%MFxy.i.152 PV_INF_C2 0.0 Process value low limit

%MFxy.i.154 PV_SUP_C2 100.0 Process value high limit

%MFxy.i.156 KP_C2 1.0 Proportional coefficient

%MFxy.i.158 TI_C2 0.0 Integral time

%MFxy.i.160 TD_C2 0.0 Derivative time

%MFxy.i.162 OUTBIAS_C2 0.0 Bias on PID loop controller output

%MFxy.i.164 INT_BAND_C2 0.0 Integral band

%MFxy.i.166 DBAND_C2 0.0 Dead band on deviation

%MFxy.i.168 SP_MIN_C2 0.0 Setpoint low limit

%MFxy.i.170 SP_MAX_C2 100.0 Setpoint high limit

%MFxy.i.172 PV_LL_C2 5.0 Process value threshold very low

%MFxy.i.174 PV_L_C2 5.0 Process value threshold low

%MFxy.i.176 PV_H_C2 95.0 Process value threshold high

%MFxy.i.178 PV_HH_C2 95.0 Process value threshold very high

%MFxy.i.180 DEV_L_C2 -5.0 Deviation low threshold

%MFxy.i.182 DEV_H_C2 5.0 Deviation high threshold

%MFxy.i.184 SQRT_OUT_C2 No object Square root output value

%MFxy.i.186 THLD_C2 1E+8 Totalizing limit

%MFxy.i.188 R_RATE_C2 0.0 Setpoint speed increase limit

%MFxy.i.190 D_RATE_C2 0.0 Setpoint speed decrease limit

%MFxy.i.192 SPEED_LIM_OUT_C2 No object Setpoint velocity limiter output value

%MFxy.i.194 INP_INFR1_C2 0.0 Secondary loop R1 set-point low scale

%MFxy.i.196 INP_SUPR1_C2 100.0 Secondary loop R1 set-point high scale


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 375


%MFxy.i.198 KP_PREV_C2 No Object Value before proportional co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.200 TI_PREV_C2 No Object Value before integral co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.202 TD_PREV_C2 No Object Value before derived co-efficient autotuning

%MFxy.i.204 OUTRATE 0.0 Output 1 speed limit

%MFxy.i.206 OUTRATE2 0.0 Output 2 speed limit

%MFxy.i.208 OUT1_INF 0.0 Low limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.210 OUT1_SUP 100.0 High limit of Output 1

%MFxy.i.212 OUT2_INF 0.0 Low limit of Output 2

%MFxy.i.214 OUT2_SUP 100.0 High limit of Output 2

%MFxy.i.216 OUT1_TH1 0.0 Threshold 1 for Hot/Cold or Split Range output 1




%MFxy.i.224 T_MOTOR1 10.0 Open time for servo drive controlled valve

%MFxy.i.226 T_MINI1 0.0 Minimum open time for servo drive controlled valve

%MFxy.i.228 T_MOTOR2 10.0 Open time for servo drive controlled valve

%MFxy.i.230 T_MINI2 0.0 Minimum open time for servo drive controlled valve




%MFxy.i.238 CL_PERF 0.1 Ratio OL/CL

%MFxy.i.240 No Object



Comment

376 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000




%MWxy.i.248 Simulated PV_C1 No Object Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.249 Simulated PV_C2 No Object Simulated process value

%MWxy.i.250 Simulated FF_C1 No Object Simulated Feed forward in-put


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 377


11.6 Language objects associated with the setpoint programmer

At a Glance


This section describes the language objects associated with the setpoint program-mers.



Topic Page




378 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



Description This table describes the configuration language objects associated with the setpoint programmer.


Comment

%KWxy.i.0 CONFIG_1 Word which brings together the different configuration bits for profile 1

%KWxy.i.0:X0 Guaranteed dwell time No (0) Confirmation of guaranteed dwell time function (0: no, 1: yes)

%KWxy.i.0:X1 Dwell type 0 Holding type on guaranteed dwell time: 2 bits

%KWxy.i.0:X2 Dwell type 0

%KWxy.i.0:X3 Start With bumps (0)

Start with bumps (0: SP0) or bumpless (1: PV)

%KWxy.i.0:X4 Retry Non-contin-uous (0)

Retry of continuous profile (1) or non-continuous (0)

%KWxy.i.0:X5 Retry type With bumps (0)

Retry with bumps (0: SPi) or bumpless (1: PV)












TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 379


























Comment

380 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



















%KWxy.i.6 USED_PF1 1 Number of 1st segment of pro-file 1






%KWxy.i.12 NB_SEG_PF1 8 Number of used segments in profile 1


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 381







%KWxy.i.18 NO_SEG_RT1 1 Number of start segment for repetition of profile 1

%KWxy.i.19 NO_SEG_RT2 9 Number of start segment of retry of profile 2





%KWxy.i.24 CONF_SEG1 0 Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5) Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of the segment

%KWxy.i.25 CONF_SEG2 0 Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5) Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3)of segment

%KWxy.i.26 CONF_SEG3 0 Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5) Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 0-3) of segment




Comment

382 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000
















Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 383













%KWxy.i.53 CONF_SEG30 0 Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5) Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 03) of the segment



Comment

384 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000












%KWxy.i.65 CONF_SEG42 0 Outputs (bits 8-15) PG (bit 5) Type (bit 4) Unit (bits 03) of the segment




Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 385






%KWxy.i.72 SPP_NAME1 8 characters over 4 times 2 bytes

%KWxy.i.73 SPP_NAME2




Comment

386 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



Description This table describes the fault and diagnostics language objects associated with the setpoint programmer.


Comment

MWxy.i.0 EXCH_STS Exchange in progress

MWxy.i.1 EXCH_ERR Exchange in progress report

MWxy.i.2 CH_FLT Channel standard fault

MWxy.i.2:X7 WARN Sum of errors

MWxy.i.2:X8 ERR_CALC Calculation error

MWxy.i.2:X9 ERR_FLOAT Floating point error

MWxy.i.3 STATUS2 State of check output, SPP freeze, profile state

MWxy.i.3:X0 STOR0 0 State of check 0 output








MWxy.i.3:X8 STS_SPP_HOLD 0 Setpoint programmer function freeze

MWxy.i.3:X9 STS_INIT 1 1: all profiles are in INIT

MWxy.i.3:X10 STS_RUN 0 1: the profile in progress is in RUN mode

MWxy.i.3:X11 STS_STOP 0 1: the profile in progress is in STOP mode

MWxy.i.3:X12 STS_HOLD_PG 0 1: the guaranteed dwell time function is inhibited

MWxy.i.3:X15 STS_ERR_SEG 0 Parameter error on current segment

MWxy.i.4 STATUS3 Indicates errors on profiles 1 to 4

MWxy.i.4:X0 WRN1_RMP_SP No Object Profile 1 ramp has 2 identical setpoints

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 387


MWxy.i.4:X1 WRN1_RMP_0 No Object Profile 1 ramp has zero speed

MWxy.i.4:X2 WRN1_PLR_SP No Object A profile 1 dwell time has 2 different setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X3 WRN1_PLR_THLD No Object Configured guaranteed dwell time on profile 1 and THLD zero

MWxy.i.4:X4 WRN2_RMP_SP No Object Profile 2 a ramp has 2 identi-cal setpoints


MWxy.i.4:X6 WRN2_PLR_SP No Object A profile 2 dwell has 2 differ-ent setpoints

MWxy.i.4:X7 WRN2_PLR_THLD No Object Configured guaranteed stop time on profile 2 and THLD zero









MWxy.i.5 STATUS4 Indication of errors on profiles 5 and 6


MWxy.i.5:X1 WRN5_RMP_0 No Object A profile 5 ramp has zero speed



Comment

388 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000


MWxy.i.5:X3 WRN5_PLR_THLD No Object Configured guaranteed dwell time on profile 5 and zero THLD


MWxy.i.5:X5 WRN6_RMP_0 No Object A profile 6 ramp has zero speed


MWxy.i.5:X7 WRN6_PLR_THLD No Object Configured guaranteed dwell time on profile 6 and zero THLD

MWxy.i.6 Reserved

MWxy.i.7 CMD_ORDER Command order (single word)

MDxy.i.8 CMD_PARAM Command parameter (double word)

MWxy.i.10 CUR_PF No Object Current profile number

MWxy.i.11 SEG_OUT No Object Current segment number

MWxy.i.12 CUR_ITER No Object Number of current retry

MWxy.i.13 NB_RT_PF1 1 Number of profile 1 retry






MWxy.i.19 0 Type of segments currently being carried out

MWxy.i.19:X1 Type of dwell 0 Type of maintain on guaran-teed dwell time: 2 bitsBits coding:l Top: X2=0 et X1=1l Bottom: X2=1 et X1=0l Top and Bottom: X2=1 et

X1= 1l No guaranteed dwell time:

X2=0 et X1=0

MWxy.i.19:X2 Type of dwell 0


Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 389


MWxy.i.19:X3 Guaranteed dwell time 0 1 : the guaranteed dwell time is configured or a segment is currently being carried out

MWxy.i.19:X4 Dwell time 0 1 : dwell time is in progress

MWxy.i.19:X5 Type of ramp 0 1 : a rising ramp is in progress

MWxy.i.19:X6 Ramp type 0 1 : a falling ramp is in progress


Comment

390 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000



Description This table describes the process control language objects associated with the set-point programmer.


Comment

MFxy.i.20 SP No object Calculated setpoint (output) value

MFxy.i.22 TOTAL_TIME No object Value of total time elapsed (includ-ing freeze times)

MFxy.i.24 CUR_TIME No object Value of total time elapsed on the segment in progress (including freeze times)

MFxy.i.26 THLD_PF1 0.0 Value of the guaranteed dwell time threshold of profile 1






MFxy.i.38 SP0_PF1 0.0 Value of initial setpoint of profile 1






MFxy.i.50 SP1 0.0 Setpoint to be reached by segment 1

MFxy.i.52 VAL1 0.0 Value of the time or speed for seg-ment 1



TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 391






















Comment

392 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000






















Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 393






















Comment

394 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000






















Comment

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000 395


















MFxy.i.242 TIME_SEG 0.0 Value of time remaining on the cur-rent segment


Comment

396 TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 09/2000

CBAIndex

Numerics3 single loop controller

Process control objects, 3343 single loop controllers

Default and diagnostics objects, 3253 single loops loop controller

Configuration objects, 321

AAdjust

Feed forward, 191Adjustment

Dead time, 207Model loop controller, 204, 205, 206PID, 196Time constant, 209

Adjustment screen, 234, 247Alarm pages, 241, 255Alarm screens, 241, 255Auto Selector loop

Introduction, 47Auto-selector

Process control objects, 372Auto-selector loop

Configuration objects, 359Fault and diagnostics object, 365

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 9/15/00

AutotuningAutotuning process, 145Diagnostics, 148Duration of division too long, 152Duration of division too short, 151Inconsistent response, 150Insufficient variation, 149Integrating process, 153Large overshoot process, 152Noise too high, 150Non-mimimum phase process, 152Non-symmetrical process, 152Operating modes, 147Parameters, 142Performance criterion, 146Process value not initially stabilized, 151Reasons for aborting, 149Saturation of the process value, 149Step function parametering, 145Stopping after a system fault, 149

Autotuning screen, 236

BBehavior of loops during I/O errors, 285BIAS, 131

397

Index

BranchAnalog output, 63Command, 58Feed Forward, 57Loop controller, 58Output, 63Process value, 53PWM output, 66Servo drive output, 64Setpoint, 55Summary, 67

Browsing, 226Built-in functions

Introduction, 49Bumpless start, 74

CCascade loop

Configuration objects, 340Fault and diagnostics objects, 346Introduction, 46Process control objects, 353

Closed loop adjustment, 197Cold autotuning, 140Command parameter

3 single loops loop controller, 298Auto selector loop, 298Cascade loop, 298Setpoint programmer, 298

ConfigurationInputs, 179Methodology, 178Multi-station, 187Outputs, 179

Control loops command word, 302Control outputs, 73Control screen, 245Controlling Servo output without position copy in manual mode, 282Corrector

ON OFF 3 states, 123PID, 126

398

DData storage, 218Dead band on deviation, 130, 139Debug

Feed forward gain adjustment, 192Leadlag adjustment, 193

DebuggingScreen description, 212Setpoint programmer, 216

Delayed model output, 139Derivative action, 129, 202Direct action, 129, 138Distribution of process control handling, 276

FFeed forward

Alarm on deviation, 118Leadlag, 116Scaling, 114

Front panel screen, 232

HHandling process control operations according to the PLC operating mode, 279

IInputs

Configuration, 179Installation

Methodology, 34Integral action, 201Integral band, 130Integrating processes, 139Inverse action, 129, 138

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 9/15/00

Index

LLoop controller

Autotuning, 140Heat/Cool, 61, 157IMC, 60mixed PID, 127Model loop controller, 135ON OFF 2 states, 59, 121ON OFF 3 states, 59parallel PID, 128PID, 60Split Range, 61, 154

Loop controllersAt a Glance, 39Exchange zone, 183Parametering, 23, 25Structure, 41, 43

Loop sampling, 276

MMan-Machine Interface

Methods of use, 185Model, 224Model loop controller

Parameters, 138Monitoring screen, 231, 243Multitasking application, 278

Optimizing operation functions, 278

OOpen loop adjustment, 198Operating, 221Operating modes

3 Single Loops, 288Auto selector loop, 291Cascade loop, 289Process Loop, 287

Operating pages, 224Optimizing processor loading, 276

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 9/15/00

OutputBipolar format, 173Output address assignment, 173Output format, 173Output limiter, 171Output range, 173PWM, 167Scaling, 169Servo, 161Unipolar format, 173

Output scalingScale factor, 169

OutputsConfiguration, 179

PParameters

Modification, 214PID

Detailed equations, 132Parameters, 129

Process controlInstalling XBT, 35Processors, 19Software tools, 20

Process control channelsAt a Glance, 39

Process control handlingCold restart, 280PLC power-up, 279Processor in RUN mode, 279Switching to STOP mode, 279Warm restart, 280

Process control loopGlobal parameters, 81

Process control loopsAuto / Manual switching, 284Autotuning execution, 283Control in manual mode, 282Execution in automatic mode, 282Manual / Auto switching, 284Tracking mode execution, 283

Process controllersGlobal parameters, 81

399

Index

Process loopConfiguration objects, 307Error and diagnostics objects, 311Introduction, 44Process control object, 316

Process valueFirst order filtering, 88Function generator, 91Input format, 86Level alarms, 96Scale limiter, 95Scaling, 94Square root, 90Totalizer, 98

ProcessorsFeatures, 19

Profile, 76Proportional action, 200PWM, 66

Function period, 168Resolution, 168Time base, 168

SSERVO, 64Servo

Actuator opening time, 163Automatic mode with position copy, 164Automatic mode without copy position, 165Manual mode without position copy, 166Minimum pulse period, 163Position stops, 163Pulse period, 163With copy position, 162Without copy position, 162

Servo drive without output copy, 139Setpoint

Ratio, 102Scaling, 105Selection, 104Setpoint limiter, 107Speed limiter, 111Tracking setpoint, 109

400

Setpoint programmerBumpless start, 74Configuration object, 379Control outputs, 73Description, 69Fault and diagnostics object, 387Guaranteed dwell time, 71initialization, 80Link to other loops, 78Operation monitoring, 80Parameters, 79Process control objects, 391Profile execution, 76

Setpoint programmer command word, 304Setpoint programmer screen, 237, 238, 240, 249, 251, 254Single loop

Introduction, 45Synchronization

Trigger bits, 277Synchronizing pre- and post- processing, 277

TTrend screen, 233TXBT-F, 222TXBT-F02 screens, 242

WWarm autotuning, 141

XXBT Loading, 229XBT-F, 221, 222XBT-F01 screens, 230XBT-F02 screens, 242

TLX DS 57 PL7 40E 9/15/00